Dodge Automobile 2004 DR Ram SRT 10 User Manual

TABLE OF CONTENTS  
SECTION  
PAGE  
1
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3  
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9  
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61  
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121  
STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149  
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195  
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213  
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261  
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279  
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289  
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
10  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INTRODUCTION  
1
CONTENTS  
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4  
How To Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4  
Warnings And Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5  
Van Conversions/Campers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5  
Vehicle Identification Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6  
Vehicle Modifications / Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4
INTRODUCTION  
INTRODUCTION  
WARNING!  
This manual has been prepared with the assistance of  
service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with  
the operation and maintenance of your new vehicle. It is  
supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet and  
various customer oriented documents. You are urged to  
read these publications carefully. Following the instruc-  
tions and recommendations in this manual will help  
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.  
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain  
vehicle components contain or emit chemicals  
known to the State of California to cause cancer and  
birth defects or other reproductive harm. In addition,  
certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain prod-  
ucts of component wear contain or emit chemicals  
known to the State of California to cause cancer and  
birth defects or other reproductive harm.  
NOTE: After you read the manual, it should be stored  
in the vehicle for convenient reference and remain with  
the vehicle when sold, so that the new owner will be  
aware of all safety warnings.  
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL  
Consult the table of contents to determine which section  
contains the information you desire.  
When it comes to service, remember that your dealer  
knows your vehicle best, has the factory-trained techni-  
cians and genuine Moparparts, and is interested in  
your satisfaction.  
The detailed index, at the rear of this manual, contains a  
complete listing of all subjects.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
INTRODUCTION  
5
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS  
VAN CONVERSIONS/CAMPERS  
This manual contains WARNINGS against operating  
procedures which could result in an accident or bodily  
injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures  
which could result in damage to your vehicle. If you do  
not read this entire manual you may miss important  
information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.  
The Manufacturer’s Warranty does not apply to body  
modifications or special equipment installed by van  
conversion/camper manufacturers/ body builders. Such  
equipment includes video monitors, VCRs, heaters,  
stoves, refrigerators, etc. For warranty coverage and  
service on these items, contact the applicable manufac-  
turer.  
1
Operating instructions for the special equipment in-  
stalled by the conversion/camper manufacturer should  
also be supplied with your vehicle. If these instructions  
are missing, please contact your selling dealer for assis-  
tance in obtaining replacement documents from the  
applicable manufacturer.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
6
INTRODUCTION  
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER  
The vehicle identification number (VIN) is found on a  
stamped plate located on the left front corner of the  
instrument panel pad, visible from outside of the vehicle  
through the windshield. This number also appears on the  
Automobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a  
window on your vehicle. Save this label for a convenient  
record of your vehicle identification number and optional  
equipment.  
NOTE: It is illegal to remove the VIN plate.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
INTRODUCTION  
7
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS / ALTERATIONS  
1
WARNING!  
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle  
could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety  
and may lead to an accident resulting in serious  
injury or death.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE  
2
CONTENTS  
A Word About Your Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11  
Key-In-Ignition Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11  
Sentry Key If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11  
Manual Transmissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14  
Door Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14  
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14  
Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14  
Remote Keyless Entry If Equipped . . . . . . . . .17  
To Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18  
To Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19  
Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20  
Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . . .21  
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22  
Transmitter Battery Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23  
Security Alarm System If Equipped . . . . . . . . .24  
Rearming Of The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24  
To Set The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE  
To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25  
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26  
Power WindowsIf Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .26  
Sliding Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27  
Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27  
Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27  
Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28  
Seat Belt Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36  
Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38  
Restraint System (SRS)Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . .39  
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49  
Engine Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . .57  
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58  
Transporting Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58  
Lock Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58  
Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59  
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60  
(BeltAlert) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37  
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60  
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . .38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11  
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS  
SENTRY KEY — IF EQUIPPED  
The double sided keys may be inserted into the locks  
with either side up. The keys for your new vehicle are  
enclosed in a plastic bag with a bar code label affixed to  
the front. The bar code can be used to order duplicate  
keys from your dealer or a locksmith. If you received  
your keys without the bag, ask your dealer to give you  
the number.  
With this system, an electronically coded ignition key  
sends a signal to the vehicle electronics. If the electronics  
recognizes the signal, the vehicle will start and continue  
to run. If the system does not recognize the signal the  
vehicle will start and run for a maximum of 2 seconds  
after the initial key ON. After six unsuccessful attempts  
at starting, the system will shut down until the correct  
key is used.  
2
Key-In-Ignition Reminder  
If you open the drivers door when the key is in the  
ignition switch, a chime will sound to remind you to  
remove the key.  
NOTE: The Sentry Key Immobilizer System is not  
compatible with remote starting systems. Use of these  
systems may result in vehicle starting problems and a  
loss of security protection. Additional Sentry Keys or  
Mobil Speed-passdevices held against or immediately  
adjacent to the ignition key when starting the engine may  
cause vehicle starting problems. If a problem occurs,  
remove the Sentry Key from the key-ring and attempt to  
start the vehicle again. Pagers, cell phones, walkman, etc.  
will have no effect on this system.  
CAUTION!  
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation to thieves.  
Always remove the key from the ignition and lock  
all the doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE  
The Security Light, located in the instrument cluster,  
will illuminate for about 2 seconds when the ignition  
switch is first turned to the ON position. If the vehicle  
electronics do not receive a valid signal from the ignition  
key, the Security Lightwill flash continuously to signal  
that the vehicle has been immobilized. If the Security  
Lightremains on during vehicle operation, it indicates a  
fault in the system electronics. If this option was ordered,  
all of the keys provided with your new vehicle have been  
programmed to the vehicle electronics.  
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided  
with a four digit PIN number. This number is required  
for dealer replacement of keys. Duplication of keys may  
be performed at an authorized dealer or by using the  
Customer Key Programming procedure. This procedure  
consists of programming a blank key to the vehicle  
electronics. A blank key is one which has never been  
programmed and needs to be cut.  
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key System serviced,  
bring all vehicle keys to the dealer.  
Replacement Keys  
NOTE: Only keys that have been programmed to the  
vehicle electronics can be used to start the vehicle. Once  
a Sentry Key has been programmed to a vehicle, it cannot  
be programmed to any other vehicle.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13  
Customer Key Programming  
You can program new keys to the system if you have two  
valid keys by doing the following:  
The new Sentry Key has been programmed. Repeat this  
process to program up to an additional 6 keys. A maxi-  
mum of 8 keys can be programmed to the system,  
including the original keys provided with the vehicle.  
2
1. Insert the first valid key into the ignition and turn the  
ignition to the ON position for at least 3 seconds but no  
longer than 15 seconds. Turn the ignition back to the OFF  
position and remove the first key.  
General Information  
This device complies with part 15 of FCC rules and with  
RS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the  
following conditions:  
2. Insert the second valid key and switch the ignition to  
the ON position within 15 seconds. After 10 seconds the  
Security Lightwill begin to flash. Turn the ignition back  
to the OFF position and remove the second key.  
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.  
2. This device must accept any interference that may be  
received including interference that may cause undesired  
operation.  
3. Insert a blank Sentry Key into the ignition and switch  
the ignition to the ON position within 60 seconds of  
having removed the second key. After 10 seconds the  
Security Lightwill stop flashing, then turn on for 3  
seconds; then turn off.  
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly ap-  
proved by the party responsible for compliance could  
void the users authority to operate the equipment.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE  
IGNITION AND STEERING LOCK IF EQUIPPED  
DOOR KEY  
The same key used to start the vehicle is also used to  
unlock the doors. To unlock the vehicle doors, insert the  
key into the lock and turn.  
Manual Transmissions  
Depress and hold the release button located between the  
ignition switch and the instrument panel. Turn the igni-  
tion key to LOCK and remove the key.  
To lock the doors, insert the key and turn.  
DOOR LOCKS  
Power Door Locks  
WARNING!  
For personal security and safety in the event of an  
accident, lock the vehicle doors when you drive as  
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.  
Manual Transmissions  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15  
Vehicles equipped with power door locks can be locked  
or unlocked from inside by either the use of the door lock  
switches located on the front doors or by pressing the  
LOCK or UNLOCK buttons on the Remote Keyless Entry  
key fob (if equipped).  
WARNING!  
When leaving the vehicle always remove the key  
from the ignition lock, and lock your vehicle. Do not  
leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with  
access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of  
vehicle equipment may cause severe personal inju-  
ries and death.  
2
NOTE: Vehicles equipped with remote keyless entry do  
not have a passenger side door lock cylinder.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE  
Central Locking — If Equipped  
Vehicles with security will have a feature called Central  
Locking. When the key is placed in the door cylinder  
and turned to the Unlockposition, the security will be  
disarmed, the illuminated entry will be turned on and  
that door will be mechanically unlocked. If the key is  
once again turned to the unlock position within 5 seconds  
of the first unlock, the remaining doors will unlock. If the  
key is turned to the Lockposition while all doors are  
closed, illuminated entry will be canceled, security will  
begin arming, and all doors will lock.  
Automatic Door Locks  
If this feature is enabled, your door locks will lock  
automatically when the vehicles speed exceeds 15 mph.  
As a safety feature the doors will not lock when using the  
door lock switches during the following condition:  
1. The drivers door is open while the key is in the  
ignition.  
This feature is enabled when your vehicle is shipped  
from the assembly plant and can be disabled by using the  
following procedure:  
1. Enter your vehicle and close all doors.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17  
2. Fasten your seat belt (Fastening the seat belt will  
cancel any chiming that may confuse you during this  
programming procedure).  
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY IF EQUIPPED  
2
3. Place the key into the ignition.  
4. Within 10 seconds cycle the key from the OFF position  
to the ON position four times; ending in the ON position  
( Do not start the engine ).  
5. Within 30 seconds, press the drivers door lock switch  
in the LOCK direction.  
6. A single chime will be heard to indicate the feature has  
been disabled.  
This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors from  
distances up to about 23 feet (7 meters) using a hand held  
radio transmitter. The transmitter need not be pointed at  
the vehicle to activate the system.  
7. To reactivate this feature, repeat the above steps.  
8. If a chime is not heard, program mode was canceled  
before the feature could be disabled. If necessary, repeat  
the above procedure.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE  
To unlock the doors:  
5. Press and hold the UNLOCK button on a programmed  
(i.e. functional) key fob.  
Press and release the UNLOCK button on the key fob  
once to unlock only the drivers door or twice to unlock  
all the doors. When the UNLOCK button is pressed, the  
illuminated entry will initiate, the parking lights will  
flash on twice and if installed, the cargo lamp will turn on  
for 30 seconds.  
6. Continue to hold the UNLOCK button, wait at least 4  
seconds, but no longer than 10 seconds, then press and  
hold the LOCK button.  
7. When a single chime is heard, release both buttons.  
The system can be programmed to unlock all the doors  
upon the first UNLOCK button press by using the  
following procedure:  
8. Turn the ignition to the OFF position or wait 60  
seconds.  
9. To reactivate this feature, repeat the above steps.  
1. Enter your vehicle and close all doors.  
10. If a chime is not heard, program mode was canceled  
before the feature could be changed. If necessary, repeat  
the above procedure.  
2. Fasten your seat belt.(Fastening the seat belt will  
cancel any chiming that may confuse you during this  
programming procedure).  
3. Place the key into the ignition.  
4. Turn the ignition to the ON position ( Do not start the  
engine ).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19  
To lock the doors:  
5. Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed  
(i.e. functional) key fob.  
Press and release the LOCK button on the transmitter to  
lock all doors. If the ignition is OFF, when the doors are  
locked, the parking lights will flash on once and the horn  
will chirp once.  
6. Continue to hold the LOCK button, wait at least 4  
seconds, but no longer than 10 seconds, then press and  
hold the UNLOCK button.  
2
The horn chirp feature will be shipped from the assembly  
plants activated. If desired this feature can be disabled by  
using the following procedure:  
7. When a single chime is heard, release both buttons.  
8. Turn the ignition to the OFF position or wait 60  
seconds.  
1. Enter your vehicle and close all doors.  
9. Test the horn chirp feature by pressing the LOCK  
button on the key fob with the ignition in the OFF  
position, or the key removed.  
2. Fasten your seat belt (fastening the seat belt will cancel  
any chiming that may confuse you during this program-  
ming procedure).  
10. To reactivate this feature, repeat the above steps.  
3. Place the key into the ignition.  
Vehicles will be shipped from the assembly plants with  
the park lamp flash feature activated. If desired, this  
feature can be disabled by using the following procedure:  
4. Turn the ignition to the ON position ( Do not start the  
engine ).  
1. Enter your vehicle and close all doors.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE  
2. Fasten your seat belt (fastening the seat belt will cancel  
any chiming that may confuse you during this program-  
ming procedure).  
10. To reactivate this feature, repeat the above steps.  
11. If a chime is not heard, program mode was canceled  
before the feature could be disabled. If necessary, repeat  
the above procedure.  
3. Place the key into the ignition.  
4. Turn the ignition to the ON position ( Do not start the  
engine ).  
Using the Panic Alarm  
To activate the Panic mode while the ignition is OFF press  
and release the PANIC button on the transmitter once.  
When the Panic mode is activated, the interior lights will  
illuminate, the headlamps and parking lights will flash,  
and the horn will sound.  
5. Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed  
(i.e. functional) key fob.  
6. Continue to hold the LOCK button, wait at least 4  
seconds, but no longer than 10 seconds, then press and  
hold the PANIC button.  
To cancel the Panic mode press and release the PANIC  
button on the transmitter a second time. Panic mode will  
automatically cancel after 3 minutes or if the vehicle is  
started and exceeds 15 mph. During the Panic Mode, the  
door locks and remote keyless entry systems will func-  
tion normally. Panic mode will not disarm the security  
system on vehicles so equipped.  
7. When a single chime is heard, release both buttons.  
8. Turn the ignition to the OFF position or wait 60  
seconds.  
9. Test the park lamp flash feature by pressing the LOCK  
button on the key fob with the ignition in the OFF  
position or the key removed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21  
Programming Additional Transmitters  
3. Place the key into the ignition.  
Vehicles with the keyless entry option will be shipped  
from the assembly plants with two key fob transmitters  
programmed only for that vehicle. A total of four fobs can  
be programmed for your vehicle. Additional fobs can be  
programmed to your vehicle through the use of a cur-  
rently programmed fob.  
4. Turn the ignition to the ON position ( Do not start the  
engine ).  
2
5. Press and hold the UNLOCK button on a programmed  
(i.e. functional) key fob.  
6. Continue to hold the UNLOCK button, wait at least 4  
seconds, but no longer than 10 seconds, then press and  
hold the PANIC button.  
NOTE: When entering program mode using that fob,  
ALL currently programmed fobs will be erased and you  
will have to reprogram them for your vehicle. However,  
if program mode is entered and no action is performed,  
the previously programmed fobs will continue to func-  
tion.  
7. When a single chime is heard, release both buttons.  
The chime indicates that the system is in program mode.  
8. Press and release both the LOCK and UNLOCK  
buttons, simultaneously on the fob to be programmed.  
1. Enter your vehicle and close all doors.  
9. A single chime will be heard. The chime indicates that  
the fob has been recognized.  
2. Fasten your seat belt (fastening the seat belt will cancel  
any chiming that may confuse you during this program-  
ming procedure).  
10. Within 4 seconds of hearing the chime, press and  
release any button on the fob being programmed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE  
11. A single chime will be heard. The chime indicates  
that the fob has been programmed.  
2. This device must accept any interference that may be  
received including interference that may cause undesired  
operation.  
12. Repeat steps 8 to 11 for a total of 4 fobs.  
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly ap-  
proved by the party responsible for compliance could  
void the users authority to operate the equipment.  
13. Turn the ignition to the OFF position or wait 60  
seconds to exit program mode.  
14. Your vehicle will remain in program mode for up to  
60 seconds from when the original chime (i.e. Step #7)  
was heard. After 60 seconds, all programmed fobs will  
function normally.  
If your Keyless Entry Transmitter fails to operate from a  
normal distance, check for these two conditions.  
1. Weak batteries in transmitter. The expected life of the  
batteries is from one to two years.  
NOTE: If you do not have a programmed transmitter,  
contact your dealer for details.  
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station  
tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB radios.  
General Information  
This device complies with part 15 of FCC rules and with  
RS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the  
following conditions:  
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23  
Transmitter Battery Service  
1. With transmitter buttons facing down, use a flat blade  
or dime to pry the two halves of the transmitter apart.  
Make sure not to damage the rubber gasket during  
removal.  
2
2. Remove and replace the batteries. Be careful not to  
disturb the metal terminal near the batteries. Install the  
batteries with the positive terminal up, reference the note  
+ SIDE UPon the inside of the bottom half of the  
transmitter case. Avoid touching the new batteries with  
your fingers. Skin oils may cause battery deterioration. If  
you touch a battery, clean it with rubbing alcohol.  
3. To reassemble the transmitter case snap the two halves  
together. Make sure there is an even gap between the two  
halves. Test transmitter operation.  
The recommended replacement battery is a 3V lithium  
2016 cell. This transmitter requires two batteries.  
NOTE: Do not touch the battery terminals that are on  
the back housing or the printed circuit board.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE  
SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED  
This system monitors the vehicle doors and ignition for  
unauthorized operation. When the alarm is activated, the  
system provides both audible and visual signals. For the  
first 3 minutes the horn will sound and the headlights  
and security telltale will flash repeatedly. For an addi-  
tional 15 minutes only the headlights and security telltale  
will flash. The engine will run only if a valid Sentry Key  
is used to start the vehicle. Use of the Sentry Key will  
disable the alarm.  
To Set the Alarm:  
The alarm will set when you use the power door locks,  
turn the key in the drivers door lock cylinder, or use the  
Keyless Entry transmitter to lock the doors. After all the  
doors are locked and closed the SECURITY light in the  
instrument cluster will flash rapidly to signal that the  
system is arming. The security light in the instrument  
panel cluster will flash rapidly for about 16 seconds to  
indicate that the alarm is being set. After the alarm is set,  
the security light will flash at a slower rate to indicate  
that the system is armed.  
Rearming of the System:  
The security system will rearm itself after the 15 addi-  
tional minutes of headlights and security telltale flashing,  
if the system has not been disabled. If the condition  
which initiated the alarm is still present, the system will  
ignore that condition and monitor the remaining doors  
and ignition.  
NOTE: If the SECURITY light stays on continuously  
during vehicle operation, have the system checked by  
your dealer.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25  
To Disarm the System:  
The Security Alarm System is designed to protect your  
vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the  
system will arm unexpectedly. If you remain in the  
vehicle and lock the doors with the transmitter, the alarm  
will sound when you pull the door handle to exit. You  
may also accidentally disarm the system by unlocking  
the drivers door with the door key and then locking it  
manually with the lock plunger. The door will be locked  
but the Security Alarm will not arm.  
Use the Keyless Entry transmitter or the key to turn the  
drivers door lock to the unlock position. If something  
has triggered the system in your absence, the horn will  
sound three times when you unlock the doors and the  
security lamp will flash for 30 seconds. Check the vehicle  
for tampering.  
2
The Security system will also disarm, if the vehicle is  
started with a programmed Sentry Key. If an unpro-  
grammed Sentry Key is used to start a vehicle, the engine  
will run for 2 seconds and then the security alarm will be  
initiated. To exit alarming mode, press the transmitter  
Unlock button, unlock the drivers door using the key  
cylinder, or start the vehicle with a programmed Sentry  
Key.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE  
WINDOWS  
Power WindowsIf Equipped  
The control on the left front door panel has up-down  
switches that give you fingertip control of all power  
windows. There is a single opening and closing switch on  
the front passenger door for passenger window control.  
The windows will operate only when the ignition switch  
is turned to the ON or ACC (Accessory) position.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27  
Auto Down (Drivers Side Only)  
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS  
The drivers window switch has an Auto Down feature.  
Press the window switch past the detent, release, and the  
window will go down automatically.  
Some of the most important safety features in your  
vehicle are the restraint systems. These include the belts  
for the driver and all passengers, front airbags for both  
the driver and front passenger and, if so equipped,  
window bags for the driver and passengers seated next to  
a window. If you will be carrying children too small for  
adult-size belts, your seat belts also can be used to hold  
infant and child restraint systems.  
2
Sliding Rear Window  
A locking device in the center of the window helps to  
prevent entry from the rear of the vehicle. Squeeze the  
lock to release the window.  
WIND BUFFETING  
Please pay close attention to the information in this  
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system  
properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as  
possible.  
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of  
pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the  
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the  
windows down or partially open positions. This is a  
normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting  
occurs with the rear sliding glass open, open the front  
and rear sliding glass together to minimize the buffeting.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE  
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and that  
they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision.  
Some of the worst injuries happen when people are  
thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility  
of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the  
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should  
be belted at all times.  
WARNING!  
In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer  
much greater injuries if you are not properly buck-  
led up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or  
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the  
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your  
vehicle are buckled up properly.  
Lap/Shoulder Belts  
All seating positions have combination lap/shoulder  
belts. The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock  
during very sudden stops or collisions. This feature  
allows the shoulder part of the belt to move freely with  
you under normal conditions. But in a collision, the belt  
will lock and reduce the risk of your striking the inside of  
the vehicle or being thrown out.  
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even  
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver  
and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen  
far away from home or on your own street.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29  
WARNING!  
WARNING!  
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,  
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people  
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously  
injured or killed.  
Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat  
belts are designed to go around the large bones of  
your body. These are the strongest parts of your  
body and can take the forces of a collision the  
best. Wearing your belt in the wrong place could  
make your injuries in a collision much worse. You  
might suffer internal injuries, or you could even  
slide out of part of the belt. Follow these instruc-  
tions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep  
your passengers safe, too.  
2
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your  
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.  
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and  
using a seat belt properly.  
Two people should never be belted into a single  
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one  
another in an accident, hurting one another badly.  
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for  
more than one person, no matter what their size.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE  
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions  
3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch  
plate into the buckle until you hear a click.”  
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and  
adjust the seat.  
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the seat.  
Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt. Slide the latch  
plate up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the belt  
to go around your lap.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31  
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your  
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up  
on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight,  
tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug belt  
reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision.  
WARNING!  
A belt buckled into the wrong buckle will not  
protect you properly. The lap portion could ride too  
high on your body, possibly causing internal injuries.  
Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you.  
2
A belt that is too loose will not protect you as well.  
In a sudden stop you could move too far forward,  
increasing the possibility of injury. Wear your seat  
belt snugly.  
A belt that is worn under your arm is very danger-  
ous. Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the  
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck  
injury. And a belt worn under the arm can cause  
internal injuries. Ribs arent as strong as shoulder  
bones. Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your  
strongest bones will take the force in a collision.  
A shoulder belt placed behind will not protect you  
from injury during a collision. You are more likely to  
hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your  
shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to  
be used together.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE  
6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.  
The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position.  
If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to  
allow the belt to retract fully.  
WARNING!  
A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of  
internal injury in a collision. The belt forces wont  
be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your  
abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low as pos-  
sible and keep it snug.  
WARNING!  
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision  
and leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt  
system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose  
parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately.  
Do not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt  
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they  
have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,  
etc.) or if the airbag deployed.  
A twisted belt cant do its job as well. In a collision  
it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt is straight.  
If you cant straighten a belt in your vehicle, take it  
to your dealer and have it fixed.  
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is  
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor  
will withdraw any slack in the belt.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33  
Standard Cab Front Center Three Point Belt  
1. The front center seat belt on the Standard Cab may be  
disconnected to open up utilization of the storage areas  
behind the front seats. The black latch plate can be  
detached from the black keyed seat belt buckle located on  
the inboard side of the passenger seat. Insert the vehicle  
ignition key into the center white slot on the black buckle.  
The black buckle latch plate can be removed when the  
key is pressed into the buckle. Allow the retractor to take  
up the surplus webbing, and the buckles will hang  
vertically from the cab back exit bezel, thus freeing up all  
the area behind the front seats.  
2
Detaching Buckle with  
2. To reattach the seat belt to the front center seat, pull  
the black buckle latch plate forward from the cab back  
panel and insert it into the black keyed buckle until there  
is an audible click. Refer to the previous section for the  
proper seat belt usage.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE  
WARNING!  
If the black latch and black buckle are not prop-  
erly connected when the seat belt is used by an  
occupant, the seat belt will not be able to provide  
proper restraint and will increase the risk of  
injury in a collision.  
When reattaching the black latch and black  
buckle, ensure the seat belt webbing is not  
twisted. If the webbing is twisted, follow the  
preceding procedure to detach the black latch and  
black buckle, untwist the webbing, and reattach  
the black latch and black buckle.  
Inserting Latch Plate  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35  
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage  
In the front row outboard seats, the shoulder belt can be  
adjusted upward or downward to help position the belt  
away from your neck. Press the button located on the  
upper belt guide, and then move it up or down to the  
position that serves you best.  
2
In Use Position  
WARNING!  
If the black latch and buckle are not connected when  
the seat belt is used by an occupant, the seat belt will  
not restrain you properly.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE  
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will  
prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average,  
youll prefer a higher position. When you release the  
anchorage, try to move it up or down to make sure that  
it is locked in position.  
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until  
the entire belt is extracted.  
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will  
hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is  
now in the automatic locking mode.  
Automatic Locking Mode (if Equipped)  
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode  
Disconnect the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow  
it to retract completely to disengage the automatic lock-  
ing mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)  
locking mode.  
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-  
locked. The belt will still retract to remove any slack in  
the shoulder belt. The automatic locking mode is only  
available on the front passenger side belt.  
When To Use The Automatic Locking Mode  
Anytime a child safety seat is installed in a passenger  
front seating position. Children 12 years old and under  
should be properly restrained in the rear seat whenever  
possible.  
Seat Belt Pretensioners  
The seat belts for both front seating positions are  
equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to  
remove any slack from the seat belt system in the event of  
a collision. These devices improve the performance of the  
seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the  
occupant early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all  
size occupants, including those in child restraints.  
How To Use The Automatic Locking Mode  
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37  
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat  
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be  
worn snugly and positioned properly.  
if the drivers seat belt is unbuckled for more than 10  
seconds and the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (8  
km/h).  
2
The Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) can be en-  
abled or disabled by your authorized dealer or by  
following these steps:  
The pretensioners are triggered by the airbag control  
module. Like the airbags, the pretensioners are single use  
items. After a collision that is severe enough to deploy  
the airbags and pretensioners, both must be replaced.  
NOTE: The following steps must occur within the first  
60 seconds of the ignition switch being turned to the ON  
position. DaimlerChrysler does not recommend deacti-  
vating the Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert).  
Enhanced Driver Seat Belt Reminder System  
(BeltAlert)  
If the drivers seat belt has not been buckled within 60  
seconds of starting the vehicle and if the vehicle speed is  
greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), the Enhanced Warning  
System (BeltAlert) will alert the driver to buckle their seat  
belt. The driver should also instruct all other occupants to  
buckle their seat belts. Once the warning is triggered, the  
Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) will continue to  
chime and flash the Seat Belt Warning Light for 96  
seconds or until the drivers seat belt is buckled. The  
Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) will be reactivated  
NOTE: If the drivers door is open a continuous chime  
will sound and override the single chime.  
1. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and  
buckle the drivers seat belt.  
2. Start the engine and wait for the Seat Belt Warning  
Light to turn off.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE  
3. Within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle, unbuckle  
and then re-buckle the drivers seat belt at least three  
times within 10 seconds, ending with the seat belt  
buckled.  
Seat Belts and Pregnant Women  
We recommend that pregnant women use seat belts  
throughout their pregnancies. Keeping the mother safe is  
the best way to keep the baby safe.  
4. Turn off the engine. A single chime will sound to  
signify that you have successfully completed the pro-  
gramming.  
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt  
across the thighs and as snug against the hips as possible.  
Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the  
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take  
the force if there is a collision.  
The Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) can be reacti-  
vated by repeating this procedure.  
Seat Belt Extender  
NOTE: Although the Enhanced Warning System (BeltA-  
lert) has been deactivated, the Seat Belt Warning Light  
will continue to illuminate while the drivers seat belt  
remains unbuckled.  
If a seat belt is too short, even when fully extended, your  
dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender. This  
extender should be used only if the existing belt is not  
long enough. When it is not required, remove the ex-  
tender and store it.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39  
These airbags are certified to the new Federal regulations  
that allow less forceful deployments.  
WARNING!  
Using a seat belt extender when not needed can  
increase the risk of injury in a collision. Only use the  
seat belt extender when the lap belt is not long  
enough when it is worn low and snug, and in the  
recommended seating positions. Remove and store  
the extender when not needed.  
2
Driver And Right Front Passenger Supplemental  
Restraint System (SRS)Airbag  
This vehicle has front airbags for both the driver and  
front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint  
systems. The drivers front airbag is mounted in the  
center of the steering wheel. The passengers front airbag  
is mounted in the instrument panel, above the glove  
compartment. The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on  
the airbag covers.  
This vehicle may also be equipped with window bags to  
protect the driver and passengers sitting next to a win-  
dow. If the vehicle is equipped with window bags, they  
are located above the side windows. Their covers are also  
labeled SRS AIRBAG.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE  
Airbags inflate in moderate to high speed impacts. Along  
with the seat belts, front airbags work with the instru-  
ment panel knee bolsters to provide improved protection  
for the driver and front passenger. Window bags also  
work with seat belts to improve occupant protection.  
WARNING!  
Do not put anything on or around the airbag covers or  
attempt to manually open them. You may damage the  
airbags and you could be injured because the airbags  
are not there to protect you. These protective covers for  
the airbag cushions are designed to open only when the  
airbags are inflating.  
Do not mount any aftermarket equipment such as trailer  
brake controllers, snowplow controllers, auxiliary light  
switches, radios, etc. on or behind the knee bolster.  
Knee bolsters are designed to work with the air bag and  
seat belt to protect you. Mounting any additional equip-  
ment on or behind the knee bolster can cause injury  
during a crash.  
The seat belts are designed to protect you in many types  
of collisions. The front airbags deploy in moderate to  
severe frontal collisions. If your vehicle is so equipped,  
the window bag on the crash side of the vehicle is  
triggered in moderate to severe side collisions. In certain  
types of collisions, both the front and side airbags may be  
triggered. But even in collisions where the airbags work,  
you need the seat belts to keep you in the right position  
for the airbags to protect you properly.  
If your vehicle is equipped with window bags, do not  
stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to block  
the location of the window bag. The area where the  
window bag is located should remain free from any  
obstructions.  
If your vehicle is equipped with window bags, do not  
have any accessory items installed which will alter the  
roof, including adding a sunroof to your vehicle. Do not  
add roof racks that require permanent attachments  
(bolts or screws) for installation on the vehicle roof. Do  
not drill into the roof of the vehicle for any reason.  
Here are some simple steps you can follow to minimize  
the risk of harm from a deploying airbag.  
Children 12 years and under should ride buckled up in  
a rear seat, if available.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41  
Infants in rear facing child restraints must NEVER  
ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger front  
airbag unless the airbag is turned off (Standard Cab  
Vehicles Only). An airbag deployment can cause se-  
vere injury or death to infants in that position. See the  
Passenger Airbag On/Off Switch section.  
WARNING!  
Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more  
severe injuries in a collision. The airbags work  
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In  
some collisions the airbags wont deploy at all.  
Always wear your seat belts even though you  
have airbags.  
2
If your vehicle does not have a rear seat, see the  
Passenger Airbag On/Off Switch section.  
Being too close to the steering wheel or instru-  
ment panel during airbag deployment could cause  
serious injury. Airbags need room to inflate. Sit  
back, comfortably extending your arms to reach  
the steering wheel or instrument panel.  
Children that are not big enough to properly wear the  
vehicle seat belt (see section on Child Restraints)  
should be secured in belt-positioning booster seats.  
Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind  
them or under their arm.  
If the vehicle has window airbags, they also need  
room to inflate. Do not lean against the door or  
window. Sit upright in the center of the seat.  
All occupants should use their seat belts properly.  
The driver and front passenger seats should be moved  
back as far as practical to allow the airbag room to  
inflate.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE  
Airbag System Components  
The Window Airbag System, on vehicles equipped,  
consists of the following:  
The airbag system consists of the following:  
AIRBAG Readiness Light (shared with the front airbag  
system)  
Airbag Control Module  
AIRBAG Readiness Light  
Window Bags Above the Side Windows.  
Driver Airbag  
Airbag Control Module (shared with the front airbag  
system)  
Passenger Airbag  
Steering Wheel and Column  
Instrument Panel  
Side impact sensors  
Interconnecting Wiring  
Crash Sensor  
Interconnecting Wiring  
Knee Impact Bolsters  
Passenger Side Frontal Airbag ON/OFF Switch (Stan-  
dard Cab Vehicles Only)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43  
How The Airbag System Works  
If it detects a malfunction in any part of the  
system, it turns on the light either momen-  
tarily or continuously. The instrument cluster  
The airbag control module determines if a frontal  
collision is severe enough to require the airbags to  
inflate.  
will flash the seat belt indicator if it detects a fault with  
the airbag indicator.  
2
The airbag control module will not detect roll over, or  
rear collisions.  
WARNING!  
The airbag control module also monitors the readiness  
of the electronic parts of the system whenever the  
ignition switch is in the RUN position. These include  
all of the items listed above except the knee bolsters,  
the instrument panel, and the steering wheel and  
column. If the key is in the Offposition, in the ACC  
position or not in the ignition, the airbags are not on  
and will not inflate  
Ignoring the AIR BAG light in your instrument  
panel could mean you wont have the airbags to  
protect you in a collision. If the light does not come  
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes  
on as you drive, have the airbag system checked  
right away.  
The airbag control module also turns on the AIR BAG  
light in the instrument panel for 6 to 8 seconds when  
the ignition is first turned on, then turns the light off.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE  
When the airbag control module detects a collision  
requiring the airbags, it signals the inflator units. A  
large quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to inflate  
the airbags. The airbag covers separate and fold out of  
the way as the airbags inflate to their full size. The  
airbags fully inflate in milliseconds. This is less time  
than it takes you to blink your eyes. The airbags then  
quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and  
front passenger. The drivers front airbag deflates  
through vents towards the instrument panel. The  
passengers front airbag is deflated through vent holes  
in the sides of the airbag. In this way the airbags do  
not interfere with your control of the vehicle.  
Passenger Airbag On/Off Switch (Standard Cab  
Vehicles Only)  
The knee impact bolsters help protect the knees and  
position you for the best interaction with the front  
airbag.  
The passenger front airbag is to be turned off only if the  
passenger:  
is an infant (less than 1 year old) who must ride in the  
front seat because there is no rear seat, or because the  
infant has a medical condition which makes it neces-  
sary for the driver to be able to see the infant,  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45  
is a child, age 1 to 12 who must ride in the front seat  
because there is no rear seat, because there is no rear  
seat position available, or because the child has a  
medical condition which makes it necessary for the  
driver to be able to see the child,  
To Shut Off the Passenger Airbag (Standard Cab Ve-  
hicles Only)  
Place the ignition key in the Passenger Airbag On/Off  
Switch, push the key in and turn clockwise, and remove  
the key from the switch. This will shut off the passenger  
side airbag. The Offlight near the switch will illumi-  
nate when the ignition switch is turned to the ON  
position.  
2
has a medical condition which makes passenger airbag  
inflation (deployment) a greater risk for the passenger  
than the risk of hitting the dashboard (instrument  
panel) or windshield in a crash.  
To Turn On the Passenger Airbag (Standard Cab Ve-  
hicles Only)  
WARNING!  
Place the ignition key in the Passenger Airbag On/Off  
Switch, push the key in and turn counterclockwise, and  
remove the key from the switch. This will turn on the  
passenger airbag. The Offlight near the switch will be  
off when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position.  
Whenever an airbag is turned off, even a lap/  
shoulder belted passenger may hit their head, neck,  
or chest on the dashboard (instrument panel) or  
windshield in a crash. This may result in serious  
injury or death.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE  
If A Deployment Occurs  
However, if you havent healed significantly within a  
few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor  
immediately.  
The airbag system is designed to deploy when the air bag  
control module detects a moderate-to-severe frontal col-  
lision, and then immediately to deflate.  
As the airbags deflate you may see some smoke-like  
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the  
process that generates the nontoxic gas used for airbag  
inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin,  
eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation,  
rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat  
irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues,  
see your doctor. If these particles settle on your  
clothing, follow the garment manufacturers instruc-  
tions for cleaning.  
NOTE: A frontal collision that is not severe enough to  
need airbag protection will not activate the system. This  
does not mean something is wrong with the airbag  
system.  
If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags, any  
or all of the following may occur:  
The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abra-  
sions and/or skin reddening to the driver and front  
passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold. The  
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those  
you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium  
floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.  
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.  
It is not advisable to drive your vehicle after the  
airbags have deployed. If you are involved in another  
collision, the airbags will not be in place to protect you.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47  
seconds when the ignition is first turned on as a diag-  
nostic or system check, then turns the light off. If it  
detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it turns  
on the light either momentarily or continuously.  
WARNING!  
Deployed airbags cant protect you in another colli-  
sion. Have the airbags replaced by an authorized  
dealer as soon as possible.  
2
The side (window) impact SRS Airbags are designed to  
activate only in certain side collisions. When the airbag  
control module detects a collision requiring the window  
bags to inflate, it signals the inflators on the crash side of  
the vehicle. A quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to  
inflate the window bag. The inflating window bag  
pushes the side pillar molding out of the way and covers  
the window. The airbag inflates in about 30 milliseconds  
(about one-quarter of the time it takes to blink your eyes)  
with enough force to injure you if you are not belted and  
seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area  
where the window bag inflates. This especially applies to  
Window Airbags Supplemental Restraint System  
(SRS)If Equipped  
The window airbag control module determines if a side  
collision is severe enough to require the side airbags to  
inflate. The window airbag control module will not  
detect roll over, front or rear collisions.  
The airbag control module monitors the readiness of the  
electronic parts of the system whenever the ignition  
switch is in the RUNposition. These include all of the  
items listed above. The airbag control module also turns  
on the AIRBAG light in the instrument panel for 6 to 8  
1
children. The window bag is only about 3 2 inches (8.9  
cm) thick when it is inflated.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE  
Enhanced Accident Response System  
Maintaining Your Airbag Systems  
WARNING!  
If the airbags deploy after an impact and the electrical  
system remains functional, vehicles equipped with  
power door locks will unlock automatically. In addition,  
approximately 10 seconds after the vehicle has stopped  
moving, the interior lights will light until the ignition  
switch is turned off.  
Modifications to any part of the airbag system  
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could  
be injured because the airbags are not there to  
protect you. Do not modify the components or  
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or  
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or  
the upper right side of the instrument panel. Do  
not modify the front bumper, vehicle body struc-  
ture, or frame.  
You need proper knee impact protection in a  
collision. Do not mount or locate any aftermarket  
equipment on or behind the knee bolster.  
It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the  
airbag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who  
works on your vehicle that it has airbags.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49  
Airbag Light  
to inflate for your protection. Promptly check fuse num-  
bers 52 and 53 in the fuse and relay center. See your  
dealer if the fuse is good.  
You will want to have the airbags ready to inflate for your  
protection in an impact. While the airbag system is  
designed to be maintenance free, if any of the following  
occurs, have an authorized dealer service the system  
promptly:  
2
Child Restraint  
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the  
time babies and children, too. Every state in the United  
States and all Canadian provinces require that small  
children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the law,  
and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.  
The airbag light does not come on or flickers during  
the 6 to 8 seconds when the ignition switch is first  
turned on.  
The light remains on or flickers after the 6 to 8 second  
interval.  
Children 12 years and under should ride properly buck-  
led up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash  
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in  
the rear seats rather than in the front.  
The light flickers or comes on and remains on while  
driving.  
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer or any engine  
related gauges are not working, the airbag control mod-  
ule may also be disabled. The airbags may not be ready  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE  
of child restraints can be used rearward-facing: infant  
carriers and convertiblechild seats. Both types of  
child restraints are held in the vehicle by the lap/  
shoulder belt.  
WARNING!  
In a collision, an unrestrained child, even a tiny baby,  
can become a missile inside the vehicle. The force  
required to hold even an infant on your lap can  
become so great that you could not hold the child, no  
matter how strong you are. The child and others could  
be badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle  
should be in a proper restraint for the childs size.  
The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the  
vehicle. It is recommended for children who weigh up  
to about 20 lbs (9 kg). Convertiblechild seats can be  
used either rearward-facing or forward-facing in the  
vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher  
weight limit in the rearward-facing direction than  
infant carriers do, so they can be used rearward-facing  
by children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) but are  
less than one year old.  
Infants and Small Children  
There are different sizes and types of restraints for  
children from newborn size to the child almost large  
enough for an adult safety belt. Use the restraint that is  
correct for your child:  
Rearward-facing child seats must NEVER be used in  
the front seat of a vehicle with a front passenger airbag  
unless the airbag is turned off. An airbag deployment  
could cause severe injury or death to infants in this  
position.  
Safety experts recommend that children ride  
rearward-facing in the vehicle until they are at least  
one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs (9 kg). Two types  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51  
Children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) and who  
are older than one year can ride forward-facing in the  
vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible  
child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for  
children who weigh 20 to 40 lbs (9 to 18 kg) and who  
are older than one year. These child seats are also held  
in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt.  
WARNING!  
Improper installation can lead to failure of an  
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a  
collision. The child could be badly injured or  
killed. Follow the manufacturers directions ex-  
actly when installing an infant or child restraint.  
2
The belt-positioning booster seat is for children weigh-  
ing more than 40 lbs (18 kg), but who are still too small  
to fit the vehicles seat belts properly. If the child  
cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicles seat  
cushion while the childs back is against the seat back,  
they should use a belt-positioning-booster seat. The  
child and booster seat are held in the vehicle by the  
lap/shoulder belt. (Some booster seats are equipped  
with a front shield and are held in the vehicle by the  
lap portion.) For further information refer to  
www.seatcheck.org.  
A rearward facing child restraint should only be  
used in the front seat if the passengers front  
airbag is Off. If the airbag is left On, a rearward  
facing child restraint in the front seat may be  
struck by a deploying passenger airbag which  
may cause severe or fatal injury to the infant.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE  
Here are some tips for getting the most out of your child  
restraint:  
If the seat belt has a cinching latch plate, pulling up on  
the shoulder portion of the lap/shoulder belt will  
tighten the belt. The cinching latch plate will keep the  
belt tight, however, any seat belt system will loosen  
with time, so check the belt occasionally and pull it  
tight if necessary.  
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it  
has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety  
Standards. We also recommend that you make sure  
that you can install the child restraint in the vehicle  
where you will use it before you buy it.  
If the seat belt has a switchable retractor, it will have a  
distinctive label: Pull the belt from the retractor until  
there is enough to allow you to pass through the child  
restraint and slide the latch plate into the buckle. Then  
pull on the belt until it is all removed from the retractor.  
Allow the belt to return to the retractor, pulling on the  
excess webbing to tighten the lap portion about the child  
restraint. Refer to the Automatic Locking Modeearlier  
in this section.  
The restraint must be appropriate for your childs  
weight and height. Check the label on the restraint for  
weight and height limits.  
Carefully follow the instructions that come with the  
restraint. If you install the restraint improperly, it may  
not work when you need it.  
The passenger seat belts are equipped with either  
cinching latch plates or switchable seat belt retractors,  
which are designed to keep the lap portion tight  
around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to  
use a locking clip.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53  
If the belt still cant be tightened, or if pulling and  
pushing on the restraint loosens the belt, disconnect  
the latch plate from the buckle, turn the buckle  
around, and insert the latch plate into the buckle  
again. If you still cant make the child restraint secure,  
try a different seating position.  
WARNING!  
Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant  
or child restraint. It could come loose in a collision.  
The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow  
the manufacturers directions exactly when install-  
ing an infant or child restraint.  
2
Buckle the child into the seat according to the child  
restraint manufacturers directions.  
Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH)  
Each vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchor-  
age system called LATCH, which stands for Lower  
Anchors and Tether for CHildren. LATCH child restraint  
anchorage systems are installed in the Standard Cab  
passenger seat position and feature tether strap anchor-  
ages, which must be used, located behind the seatback  
(refer to Child Restraint Tether Anchor later in this  
section).  
When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the  
vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle.  
Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or  
collision, it could strike the occupants or seat backs  
and cause serious personal injury.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE  
The LATCH lower anchorage bars are located where the  
seatback meets the seat cushion. If the lower anchorage  
bars are not visible, identification dots are located above  
the standard cab front seat lower anchorages as a guide  
for locating the lower anchors.  
Child restraint systems having attachments designed to  
connect to the lower anchorages are now available. Child  
restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection  
to the seatback tether anchorage have been available for  
some time. In fact, many child restraint manufacturers  
will provide add-on tether strap kits for some of their  
older products.  
NOTE: For children riding in the front seat of a Stan-  
dard Cab model refer to the Passenger Airbag On/Off  
Switchlocated in this section.  
Because the lower anchorages are to be introduced to  
passenger carrying vehicles over a period of years, child  
restraint systems having attachments for those anchor-  
ages will continue to have features for installation in  
vehicles using the lap or lap/shoulder belt. They will also  
have tether straps, and you are urged to take advantage  
of all of the available attachments provided with your  
child restraint in any vehicle.  
NOTE: If your child restraint seat is not LATCH com-  
patible, install the restraint using the vehicle seat belting.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55  
Installing the Child Restraint System  
WARNING!  
We urge that you carefully follow the directions of the  
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Many,  
but not all, restraint systems will be equipped with  
separate straps on each side, with each having a hook or  
connector and a means for adjusting the tension in the  
strap. Forward-facing toddler restraints and some  
rearward-facing infant restraints will also be equipped  
with a tether strap, a hook and means for adjusting the  
tension in the strap.  
Improper installation of a child restraint to the  
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or  
child restraint. The child could be badly injured or  
killed. Follow the manufacturers directions exactly  
when installing an infant or child restraint.  
2
Child Restraint Tether Anchor  
Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for con-  
nection to tether anchors have been available for some  
time. In fact, many child restraint manufacturers will  
provide add-on tether strap kits for their older products.  
Regular Cab models of Ram Pickups have two tether  
anchorages, one each behind the front center and right  
seats.  
In general, you will first loosen the adjusters on the lower  
straps and tether straps so that you can more easily attach  
the hook or connector to the lower anchorages and tether  
anchorages. Then tighten all three straps as you push the  
child restraint rearward and downward into the seat.  
Not all child restraint systems will be installed as we  
have described here. Again, carefully follow the instruc-  
tions that come with the child restraint system.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE  
2. Lift the cover (if so equipped), and attach the hook to  
the square opening in the sheet metal.  
WARNING!  
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to  
seat failure and injury to the child. In a collision, the  
seat could come loose and allow the child to crash  
into the inside of the vehicle or other passengers, or  
even be thrown from the vehicle. Use only the  
anchor positions directly behind the child seat to  
secure a child restraint top tether strap. Follow the  
instructions below. See your dealer for help if nec-  
essary.  
3. Install the child restraint and remove the slack in the  
tether strap according to the manufacturers instructions.  
Tether Anchorage Points at the Right and Center  
Front Seat (Regular Cab - All Seats)  
1. Place the child restraint on the seat and adjust the  
tether strap so that it will reach over the seat back under  
the head restraint to the tether anchor directly behind the  
seat.  
Regular Cab With  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57  
Children Too Large for Booster Seats  
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS  
The engine in your new SRT-10 does not require a long  
break-in period. Following these few simple guidelines is  
all that is necessary for a good break-in:  
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt  
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend  
over the front of the seat when their back is against the  
seat back should use the lap/shoulder belt in a rear seat.  
2
For the first 500 miles (800 km):  
Make sure that the child is upright in the seat.  
Keep your vehicle speed below the legal, posted speed  
limit and your engine speed below 4,000 rpm.  
The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug  
as possible.  
Avoid driving at a constant speed, either fast or slow,  
for long periods of time.  
Check belt fit periodically. A childs squirming or  
slouching can move the belt out of position.  
Do not make any full throttle starts and avoid full  
throttle acceleration.  
If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the  
child closer to the center of the vehicle. Never allow a  
child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind  
their back.  
Use the proper gear for your speed range.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE  
Wait until the engine has reached normal operating  
temperature before driving at the recommended maxi-  
mum break-in speed.  
WARNING!  
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,  
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people  
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously  
injured or killed.  
Avoid excessive idling.  
Check the engine oil level at every fuel fill.  
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your  
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.  
NOTE: A new engine will consume some oil during the  
first few thousand miles of operation. This should be  
considered as a normal part of the break-in and not  
interpreted as a sign of difficulty.  
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and  
using a seat belt properly.  
SAFETY TIPS  
Lock Your Vehicle  
Transporting Passengers  
Always remove the keys from the ignition and lock all  
doors when leaving the vehicle unattended, even in your  
own driveway or garage. Try to park your vehicle in a  
well-lighted area and never invite theft by leaving ar-  
ticles of value exposed.  
This vehicle is designed to carry passengers in the cab  
only. For safety reasons, NEVER TRANSPORT PASSEN-  
GERS IN THE CARGO AREA.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59  
Exhaust Gas  
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry  
into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine  
exhaust system.  
WARNING!  
2
Be aware of changes in the sound of the exhaust system;  
exhaust fumes detected inside the vehicle; or damage to  
the underside or rear of the vehicle. Have a competent  
mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adja-  
cent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated or  
mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose connections  
could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger  
compartment. In addition, inspect the exhaust system  
each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil  
change. Replace or adjust as required.  
Exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide, a poten-  
tially toxic gas that by itself is colorless and odorless.  
To avoid inhaling these gases, the following precau-  
tions should be observed:  
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined  
areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in  
or out of the area.  
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the  
engine running for more than a short period, adjust  
your climate control system to force outside air into  
the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed and the  
controls in any position except OFF or MAX A/C.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE  
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle  
Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle  
Seat Belts  
Tires  
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts,  
frays and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced  
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.  
Examine tires for tread wear or uneven wear patterns.  
Check for stones, nails, glass or other objects lodged in  
the tread.  
Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after an accident if  
they have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,  
etc.) or if the front airbags have deployed. If there is any  
question regarding belt or retractor condition, replace the  
belt.  
Inspect for tread cuts or sidewall cracks. Check wheel  
nuts for tightness and tires for proper pressure.  
Lights  
Check the operation of all exterior lights. Check turn  
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument  
panel.  
Airbag Light  
The light should come on and remain on for 6 to 8  
seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first  
turned ON. If the light is not lit during starting, see you  
authorized dealer. If the light stays on, flickers or comes  
on while driving, have the system checked by an autho-  
rized dealer. If there is a problem with the airbag light the  
seatbelt light will flash.  
Door Latches  
Check for positive closing, latching and locking.  
Fluid Leaks  
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,  
water, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if fuel fumes are  
detected the cause should be located and corrected.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE  
CONTENTS  
3
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65  
Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65  
Exterior Mirrors Folding Feature . . . . . . . . . . .66  
Phone Call Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73  
Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . .75  
UConnectSystem Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77  
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79  
40-20-40 Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80  
Power Driver Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80  
Manual Passenger Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82  
Manual Seatback Recline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83  
Adjustable Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84  
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
62 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE  
To Open And Close The Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84  
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86  
Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86  
Battery Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87  
Headlamp Delay If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .88  
Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91  
Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92  
Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93  
Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94  
Driver Adjustable Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95  
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95  
Electronic Speed Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96  
To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96  
To Set At A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97  
To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97  
To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97  
To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97  
Vehicles Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89  
Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89  
Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89  
Cargo Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90  
Multifunction Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90  
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 63  
To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98  
Overhead Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99  
Courtesy/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99  
US/M Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100  
Reset Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101  
Global Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101  
Step Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101  
Average Fuel Economy (AVG ECO) . . . . . . . . 102  
Distance To Empty (DTE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102  
Trip Odometer (ODO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102  
Elapsed Time (ET) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103  
C/T Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103  
Automatic Compass Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . 103  
Manual Compass Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104  
To Put Into a Calibration Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 104  
Outside Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105  
Garage Door Opener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106  
Programming Homelink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107  
Using Homelink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110  
Erasing Homelink Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110  
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111  
Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112  
Cigar Lighter And Ash Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . 113  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
64 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE  
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114  
Front Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114  
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114  
Center Storage Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114  
Storage And Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115  
Pickup Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116  
Slide-In Campers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118  
Easy-Off Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 65  
MIRRORS  
CAUTION!  
Automatic Dimming MirrorIf Equipped  
This mirror automatically adjusts for annoying headlight  
glare from vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature  
on or off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror.  
A light in the button will indicate when the dimming  
feature is activated.  
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning,  
never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the  
mirror. Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and  
wipe the mirror clean.  
3
Outside Mirrors  
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s)  
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight  
overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
66 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE  
Electronic Power Mirrors If Equipped  
WARNING!  
Vehicles and other objects seen in a right side convex  
mirror will look smaller and farther away than they  
really are. Relying too much on your right side  
convex mirror could cause you to collide with an-  
other vehicle or other object. Use your inside mirror  
when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen  
in the right side convex mirror. Some vehicles will  
not have a convex right side mirror.  
Exterior Mirrors Folding Feature  
All exterior mirrors are hinged and may be moved either  
forward or rearward to resist damage. The hinges have  
three detent positions; full forward, full rearward, and  
normal.  
The controls for the power mirrors are located on the  
drivers door trim panel.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 67  
Electric Rear Window Defroster and Heated  
Sideview Mirrors If Equipped  
The Electric Rear Window Defroster and Heated  
side view mirrors are activated by pressing the  
heated grid button, located on the Climate Control panel,  
with the ignition On. Turning Off the ignition will  
deactivate the Electric Rear Window Defroster and  
Heated side view mirrors feature. These features also  
turn off after activation, when 15 minutes have elapsed.  
To reactivate, simply press the button again.  
3
HANDSFREE COMMUNICATION (UConnect) —  
IF EQUIPPED  
Set the top switch to the left or right for the left or right  
mirror, and set it to the center off position to prevent  
accidentally moving a mirror when you are finished  
adjusting the mirror. To adjust a mirror, select left or right  
with the top switch, and press one of the four arrows for  
the direction you want the mirror to move.  
UConnectis a voice-activated, hands-free, in-vehicle  
communications system. UConnect; allows you to dial  
your cellular phone using simple voice commands (e.g.,  
Callor Dial). Your cellular phones audio is trans-  
mitted through your vehicles stereo system; the system  
will automatically mute your radio before receiving or  
sending a call.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
68 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE  
UConnectallows you to transfer calls between the  
system and your cellular phone as you enter or exit your  
vehicle, and enables you to mute the systems micro-  
phone for private conversations.  
access the system. The diagram below shows the mirror  
with the appropriate buttons. Individual button behavior  
is discussed in the OperationSection.  
The UConnect; phone book enables you to store up to  
32 names and four numbers per name. This system is  
driven through your BluetoothHands-Free Profile  
cellular phone. UConnectfeatures Bluetoothtechnol-  
ogy - the global standard that enables different electronic  
devices to connect to each other without wires or a  
docking station, so UConnectworks no matter where  
you stow your cellular phone (be it your purse, pocket, or  
briefcase). UConnectallows up to seven cellular  
phones to be linked to the system, and it is available in  
English, French, or Spanish formats (as equipped).  
The UConnectsystem can be used with any Hands  
Free Profile certified Bluetoothcellular phone. If your  
cellular phone has a different profile (i.e. headset profile),  
you will not be able to use any UConnectfeatures.  
The rearview mirror contains the microphone for the  
system and the control buttons that will enable you to  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 69  
The UConnectsystem is fully integrated into your  
vehicle, including your vehicles stereo system. All voice  
prompts as well as the other partys voice in a conversa-  
tion will be played over your vehicles stereo system. The  
volume of the UConnectsystem can be controlled  
through your normal stereo controls.  
You can say Dialat the Readyprompt. When  
prompted for the phone number you wish to dial, say  
the phone number (123 456 7890).  
Alternatively as you become familiar with the UCon-  
nectsystem, you can combine the commands and  
say Dial 123 456 7890.  
3
The radio display will be used for visual prompts from  
the UConnectsystem such as caller ID.  
Pairing a Cellular Phone to the UConnectSystem  
To begin using your UConnectsystem, you must pair  
your compatible Bluetoothenabled cellular phone. To  
complete the registration process, you will need to refer-  
ence your cellular phone owners manual.  
Operation  
Voice commands can be used in the operation of the  
UConnectsystem and to navigate through the UCon-  
nectmenu structure. Voice commands should be given  
after each UConnectsystem prompt. You will be  
prompted for a specific command and then guided  
through the available options. There are two ways to give  
commands to the UConnectsystem:  
Press the Phonebutton to begin.  
After the Readyprompt, say Setup.  
When prompted, say Phone Pairing.  
You will be asked to say a four-digit pin number into  
the UConnectsystem which you will later need to  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
70 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE  
enter into your cellular phone during the cellular  
phone pairing process. You can enter any four-digit  
pin number. You will not need to remember this pin  
number after the initial registration process.  
same time. For example, if a priority 3 and priority 5  
cellular phone are both in the vehicle, the UConnect™  
system will use the priority 3 cellular phone when you  
make a call. You can select to use a lower priority  
cellular phone at any time.  
The UConnectsystem will then prompt you to begin  
the cellular phone pairing process on your cellular  
phone. Please see your cellular phone users manual  
for instructions on how to complete this step.  
Making a Phone Call Using Digit Dialing  
Press the Phonebutton to begin.  
After the Readyprompt, say Dialor Callfollowed  
by the phone number you wish to dial. For example,  
you can say Dial 123 456 7890. The phone number  
that you enter must be a valid length.  
For identification purposes, you will be prompted to  
give the UConnectsystem a name for your cellular  
phone. Each cellular phone that is paired should be  
given a unique phone name.  
Making a Phone Call Using Your UConnect™  
Phonebook  
You will then be asked to give your cellular phone a  
priority level between 1 and 7, 1 having the highest  
priority. You can connect up to seven cellular phones  
to your UConnectsystem and the priority allows the  
UConnectsystem to know which cellular phone to  
use if multiple cellular phones are in the vehicle at the  
Press the Phonebutton to begin.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 71  
After the Readyprompt, say Dialor Callfollowed  
by the name and designation of a phonebook entry  
that you wish to dial. For example, you can say Call  
John Doe Work.  
After you are finished adding an entry into the phone-  
book, you will be given the opportunity to add more  
phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the  
main menu.  
Add Names to Your UConnectPhonebook  
The UConnectsystem will allow you to enter up to 32  
names into the phonebook with each name having up to  
four associated phone numbers and designations.  
3
Press the Phonebutton to begin.  
After the Readyprompt, say Phonebook New Entry.  
Or, After the Readyprompt, say Phonebook.  
When prompted, say New Entry.  
Edit Entries in the UConnectPhonebook  
Press the Phonebutton to begin.  
After the Readyprompt, say Phonebook Edit.  
When prompted, say the name of the new entry.  
You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook  
entry that you wish to edit.  
Next, enter the number designation (e.g. Home,  
Work, Mobile, or Pager). This will allow you to  
have multiple numbers for each phonebook entry.  
Next, choose the number designation that you wish to  
edit. The choices are home, work, mobile, or pager.  
Recite the phone number for the phonebook entry that  
you are adding.  
Recite the new phone number for the phonebook entry  
that you are editing.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
72 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE  
After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook,  
you will be given the opportunities to edit another entry  
in the phonebook, call the number you just edited, or  
return to the main menu.  
phonebook from which you can choose. To select one  
of the entries from the list, press the Voice Recogni-  
tionbutton while the UConnectsystem is playing  
the desired entry and say Delete.  
Phonebook edit can be used to add another phone  
number to a name entry that already exists in the  
phonebook. For example, the entry John Doe may have a  
mobile and a home number, but you can add John Does  
work number later through phonebook edit.  
After you enter the name, the UConnectsystem will  
ask you if you wish to delete the home, work, mobile,  
or pager number for this entry.  
Delete All Entries in the UConnectPhonebook  
Press the Phonebutton to begin.  
Delete Entries in the UConnectPhonebook  
After the Readyprompt, say Phonebook Delete All.  
Press the Phonebutton to begin.  
The UConnectsystem will ask you to verify that you  
wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook.  
After the Readyprompt, say Phonebook Delete.  
After you enter the phonebook delete menu, you will  
then be asked for the name of the phonebook entry  
that you wish to delete. You can either say the name of  
a phonebook entry that you wish to delete or you can  
say List Namesto hear a list of the entries in the  
After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be  
deleted.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 73  
List All Names in the UConnectPhonebook  
Phone Call Features  
The following feature(s) can be accessed through the  
UConnectsystem if the feature(s) are available on your  
cellular service plan. For example, if your cellular service  
plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be  
accessed through the UConnectsystem.  
Press the Phonebutton to begin.  
After the Readyprompt, say Phonebook List  
Names.  
3
The UConnectsystem will play the names of all the  
phonebook entries.  
Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - No Call  
Currently in Progress  
To call one of the names in the list, press the Voice  
Recognitionbutton during the playing of the desired  
name and say Call.  
When you receive a call on your cellular phone, the  
UConnectsystem will interrupt the stereo audio and  
will ask if you would like to answer the call by pressing  
the Phonebutton. Press the Phonebutton to answer  
the call. To reject the call, press the Phonebutton until  
you hear a single beep indicating that the incoming call  
was rejected.  
The UConnectsystem will then prompt you as to  
number designation you wish to call.  
The selected number will be dialed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
74 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE  
Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - Call  
Currently in Progress  
Putting a Call on Hold and Retrieving a Call from  
Hold  
If a call is currently in progress and you have another  
incoming call, press the Phonebutton to place the  
current call on hold and answer the incoming call. To  
reject the incoming call, you can disregard the call and  
continue with your current conversation.  
To put a call on hold, press the Phonebutton until you  
hear a single beep which will indicate that the call has  
been placed on hold. To bring the call back from hold,  
press the Phonebutton.  
Toggling Between Two Calls  
Making a Second Call while Current Call in  
Progress  
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),  
press the Phonebutton until you hear a single beep  
indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls  
have switched. Only one call can be placed on hold at one  
time.  
To make a second call while you are currently in a call,  
press the Voice Recognitionbutton and say Dialor  
Callfollowed by the phone number or phonebook entry  
you wish to call. The first call will be on hold while the  
second call is in progress.  
Conference Call  
When two calls are in progress (one active and one on  
hold), press the Phonebutton until you hear a double  
beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into  
one conference call.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 75  
Three-Way Calling  
Advanced Phone Connectivity  
To initiate three-way calling, press the Voice Recogni-  
tionbutton while a call is in progress and make a second  
phone call. When the second call is established, press the  
Phonebutton until you hear a double beep indicating  
that the two calls have been joined into one conference  
call.  
Transferring an Active Call between the  
UConnectSystem and Your Cellular Phone  
The UConnectsystem allows ongoing calls to be trans-  
ferred to your cellular phone or to the UConnect™  
system without terminating the call. To transfer an ongo-  
ing call from your cellular phone to the UConnect™  
system or vice versa, press the Voice Recognitionbutton  
and say Transfer Call.  
3
Call Termination  
To end a call in progress, press the Phonebutton. All  
calls in progress will be terminated.  
Delete Paired Cellular Phones  
Phone Redial  
Press the Phonebutton to begin.  
After the Readyprompt, say Setup.  
When prompted, say Phone Pairing.  
At the next prompt, say Delete.  
Press the Phonebutton to begin.  
After the Readyprompt, say Redial.  
The UConnectsystem will call the last number that  
was dialed on your cellular phone. This may not be the  
last number dialed by your UConnectsystem.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
76 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE  
You will be asked to say the name of the phone that  
you wish to delete. You can either say the name of the  
phone that you wish to delete or you can say Allto  
delete all the phones.  
After the Readyprompt, say Setup List Phonesand  
the UConnectsystem will play the phone names of  
all paired cellular phones in order from highest prior-  
ity to lowest priority.  
Connect or Disconnect the Connection between the  
UConnectSystem and Your Cellular Phone  
Your cellular phone can be paired with many different  
electronic devices, but can only be actively connectedꢂ  
with one electronic device at a time.  
Select a Lower Priority Paired Cellular Phone  
Press the Phonebutton to begin.  
After the Readyprompt, say Setup.  
When prompted, say Select Phone.  
If you would like to connect or disconnect the Blue-  
toothconnection between a paired cellular phone and  
the UConnectsystem, follow the instruction described  
in your cellular phone users manual.  
When prompted, say the phone name of the cellular  
phone you wish to use, or say List Phonesto hear a  
list of all the phones that have been paired to your  
UConnectsystem. To select a phone from the list,  
press the Voice Recognitionbutton and say Select.  
List Paired Cellular Phone Names  
Press the Phonebutton to begin.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 77  
The lower priority phone will only be used for the next  
phone call. After that, the UConnectsystem will  
return to using the highest priority phone in the vehicle.  
Barge In - Overriding Prompts  
The Voice Recognitionbutton can be used when you  
wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice  
recognition command immediately. For example, if a  
prompt is playing Would you like to pair a phone, clear  
aꢃꢂ, you could press the Voice Recognitionbutton and  
say Pair A Phoneto select that option without having to  
listen to the rest of the voice prompt.  
UConnectSystem Features  
3
Barge In - Touch Tone Phone Inputs  
You can use your UConnectsystem to access a voice  
mail system, an automated service, or any other phone  
number that you can dial with any phone. When calling a  
number with your UConnectsystem that normally  
requires you to enter in a touch-tone sequence on your  
cellular phone keypad, you can push the Voice Recogni-  
tionbutton and say the sequence you wish to enter  
followed by Send. For example, if required to enter your  
pin number, you can press the Voice Recognitionbutton  
and say 3 7 4 6 Send, or whatever you have made your  
pin. This method can also be used in instances where you  
are pressing a number on your keypad to navigate  
through a menu structure or to enter a number for a pager.  
Language Selection  
To change the language that the UConnectsystem is  
using, press the Phonebutton and say the name of the  
language you wish to switch to (English, Español, or  
Français as equipped). After selecting one of the lan-  
guages, all prompts and voice commands will be in the  
selected language.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
78 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE  
Turning Confirmation Prompts On/Off  
Dialing Using the Cellular Phone Keypad  
Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system  
from confirming your choices (e.g. the UConnectsys-  
tem will not repeat a phone number before you dial it).  
You can dial a phone number with your cellular phone  
keypad and still use the UConnectsystem. By dialing a  
number with your paired Bluetoothcellular phone, the  
audio will be played through your vehicles stereo sys-  
tem. The UConnectsystem will work the same as if  
you dialed the number using voice recognition.  
Press the Phonebutton to begin.  
After the Readyprompt, say Setup Confirmation.  
The UConnectsystem will play the current confir-  
mation prompt status and you will be given the choice  
to change it.  
Mute/Unmute  
When you mute the UConnectsystem, you will still be  
able to hear the conversation coming from the other  
party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. In  
order to mute the UConnectsystem press the Voice  
Recognitionbutton and say Mute. In order to unmute  
the UConnectsystem; press the Voice Recognition’  
button and say Unmute.  
Low Signal, Battery Strength, and Roam  
Notification  
The UConnectsystem will provide notification to  
inform you if your cellular phone is in roaming status,  
has low signal strength, or has a low battery when you  
are trying to place a phone call.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 79  
Help  
SEATS  
If you need assistance at any prompt or if you want to  
know what your options are at any prompt, say Help.  
The UConnectsystem will play all the options at any  
prompt if you ask for help.  
The seating options available in this truck are the result of  
extensive customer research and evaluations.  
WARNING!  
3
Cancel  
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,  
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people  
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously  
injured or killed.  
At any prompt, you can say Canceland you will be  
returned to the previous menu.  
Emergency Assistance  
If you are in an emergency, say Dial Emergencyor Call  
Emergencyand the UConnectsystem will instruct  
your cellular phone to call 911.  
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your  
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.  
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and  
using a seat belt properly.  
Towing Assistance  
If you need towing assistance, say Dial Towing Assis-  
tanceor Call Towing Assistance. Please refer to the  
24-Hour Towing Assistance coverage details in the  
DaimlerChrysler Motors Company 24-Hour Towing As-  
sistance Program Guide.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
80 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE  
40-20-40 Front Seat  
WARNING!  
As the name implies, the seat is divided into 3 segments.  
The outboard seat portions are each 40% of the total  
width of the seat. The back of the center portion (20%)  
easily folds down to provide an armrest/center storage  
compartment (if equipped).  
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is  
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could  
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be  
properly adjusted and you could be injured. Adjust  
any seat only while the vehicle is parked.  
Power Driver Seat  
CAUTION!  
WARNING!  
Dont put anything under a power seat. It may cause  
damage to the seat controls.  
You can be seriously, even fatally injured riding in a  
seat with the seatback reclined. Do not ride with the  
seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no  
longer resting against your chest. If you ride in this  
position, the shoulder harness will no longer be  
restraining you. In a collision you could slide under  
the seat belt and receive serious or fatal injuries.  
Recline in a seat only when the vehicle is parked.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 81  
3
Up, Down, Forward, and Rearward  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
82 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE  
The power seat controls are on the outboard side of the  
front seat cushions. Three switches control the seat move-  
ment. The four-way switch in the center can be moved  
forward or backwards to get the most comfortable posi-  
tion. The same switch can be moved up and down to  
control seat height. Change the seat angle by using the  
two toggle switches, tilting it up or down.  
Manual Passenger Seat  
Passenger Side Manual  
The passenger seat is adjustable forward or backward  
and is equipped with a back recliner.  
Tilt Adjustment  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 83  
Manual Seatback Recline  
The recliner mechanism control is on the outboard side of  
the seat. To recline, lean forward slightly, lift the lever,  
then push back to the desired position and release the  
lever. Lean forward and lift the lever to return the  
seatback to its normal position. Using body pressure, lean  
forward and rearward on the seat to be sure the seatback  
has latched.  
3
Manual Recline Lever  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
84 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE  
Adjustable Head Restraints  
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD  
Head restraints can reduce the risk of whiplash injury in  
the event of impact from the rear. Pull up or push down  
on the restraints so that the upper edge is as high as  
practical, at least to the level of the ears.  
To lower the head restraint, push in the button and then  
push down on the head restraint.  
To open the hood, two latches must be released. First pull  
the hood release lever located below the steering wheel at  
the base of the instrument panel. Once the hood is  
released you must reach into the opening beneath the  
center of the grille and push up the latch to release the  
safety catch before raising the hood.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 85  
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to  
close it. Use a firm downward push at the front center of  
the hood to ensure that both latches engage.  
WARNING!  
If the hood is not fully latched, it could fly up when  
the vehicle is moving and block your forward vision.  
Be sure all hood latches are latched fully before  
driving.  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE  
LIGHTS  
Interior Lights  
Courtesy/ dome lights are turned on when the front  
doors are opened, when the dimmer control (rotating  
wheel on the right side of the switch) is rotated to the  
second upward detent position, or if equipped, when the  
UNLOCK button is pressed on the key fob. Rotating the  
dimmer control to the optional fully upward position will  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 87  
turn on the cargo light located on the back of the cab.  
When a door is open and the interior lights are on,  
rotating the dimmer control all the way down to the OFF  
detent will cause all the interior lights to go out. This is  
also known as the Partymode because it allows the  
doors to stay open for extended periods of time without  
discharging the vehicles battery.  
Battery Saver  
To protect the life of your vehicles battery, Load Shed-  
ding is provided for both the interior and exterior lights.  
If the ignition is off and any door is left ajar for 15  
minutes or the dimmer control is rotated upwards for 15  
minutes, the interior lights will automatically turn off.  
3
If the headlamps remain on while the ignition is cycled  
off, the exterior lights will automatically turn off after 5  
minutes. After 5 minutes timeout, if the headlamp switch  
is turned off and then turned on, the exterior lights will  
automatically turn off after 15 minutes.  
The brightness of the instrument panel lighting can be  
regulated by rotating the dimmer control up (brighter) or  
down (dimmer). When the headlights are ON you can  
supplement the brightness of the odometer, trip odom-  
eter, radio and overhead console by rotating the control  
up until you hear a click. This feature is termed the  
Parademode and is useful when headlights are re-  
quired during the day.  
If the dimmer control is rotated to the cargo lamp  
position with the ignition off, the cargo lamps will  
automatically turn off after 15 minutes.  
NOTE: Battery Saver mode is cancelled if the ignition is  
ON.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE  
Headlamp Delay If Equipped  
To aid in your exit, your vehicle, if equipped, can be  
programmed by your dealer with a headlamp delay that  
will leave the headlamps on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds.  
This delay is initiated when the ignition is turned OFF  
while the headlamp switch is on, and then the headlamp  
switch is cycled off. The headlamps will remain on for 60  
seconds. Headlamp delay can be cancelled by either  
turning the headlamp switch ON then OFF or by turning  
the ignition ON.  
Headlights, Parking Lights, Panel Lights  
When the headlight switch is rotated to the first  
position, the parking lights, taillights, side marker  
lights, license plate light and instrument panel  
lights are all turned on. The headlights will turn ON  
when the switch is rotated to the second position. The  
LAMP OUTindicator will be illuminated in the instru-  
ment cluster if a defective bulb or wiring circuit is  
detected for the headlamp system.  
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlight lenses  
that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage  
than glass headlights.  
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore  
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89  
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and  
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To  
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution fol-  
lowed by rinsing.  
Lights-on Reminder  
If the headlights, parking lights, courtesy lights or cargo  
lights are left on, after the ignition is turned off, a  
continuous chime will sound when the drivers door is  
opened.  
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel  
wool or other abrasive materials to clean the lenses.  
3
Fog Lights  
The foglights are turned ON by placing the headlight  
rotary control in the parking light or headlight position  
and pulling out the headlight rotary control. The fog  
lights will operate only when the parking lights are ON  
or when the vehicle headlights are ON low beam. An  
indicator light located left of the switch will illuminate  
when the fog lights are on. The fog lights will turn off  
when the switch is pressed in, when the headlight switch  
is rotated to the OFF position or the high beam is  
selected.  
Daytime Running Lights (Canada and Fleet  
Vehicles Only)  
The headlights on your vehicle will illuminate when the  
engine is started. This provides a constant Lights ONꢂ  
condition until the ignition is turned OFF. The lights  
illuminate at less than normal intensity. If the parking  
brake is applied the Daytime Running Lights will turn  
off.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE  
CARGO LIGHT  
illuminated and a chime will be heard. If an indicator  
fails to light when the lever is moved, it would suggest  
that the switch or indicator lamp is defective.  
The cargo lights are turned on by rotating the dimmer  
control to the optional fully upward position. The cargo  
lights will also turn on for 30 seconds when a key fob  
Unlock is pressed, as part of the illuminated entry  
feature.  
You can signal a lane change by moving the lever  
partially up or down.  
MULTIFUNCTION CONTROL LEVER  
The multifunction control lever is located on the left side  
of the steering column.  
Turn Signals  
Move the lever up or down to signal a right-hand or  
left-hand turn.  
The arrow on either side of the instrument cluster flashes  
to indicate the direction of the turn, and proper operation  
of the front and rear turn signal lights. If a defective bulb  
or wiring circuit is detected for the turn signal system, the  
arrow indicators will flash at a faster rate. Also, the  
LAMP OUTindicator in the instrument cluster will be  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91  
Passing Light  
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by  
partially pulling the multifunction lever toward the steer-  
ing wheel. This will cause the high beam headlights to  
turn on until the lever is released.  
3
High Beam / Low Beam Select Switch  
Pull the multifunction control lever fully toward the  
steering wheel to switch the headlights from HIGH or  
LOW beam.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE  
Windshield Wipers  
Intermittent Wiper System  
The intermittent feature of this system was designed for  
use when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle,  
with a variable pause between cycles, desirable. For  
maximum delay between cycles, rotate the control knob  
into the upper end of the delay range.  
The wipers and washers are operated by a switch in the  
multifunction control lever. Turn the end of the handle to  
select the desired wiper speed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93  
The delay interval decreases as you rotate the knob until  
it enters the LO continual speed position. The delay can  
be regulated from a maximum of about 15 seconds  
between cycles, to a cycle every 2 seconds. The delay  
intervals will double in duration when the vehicle speed  
is 10 mph (16 km) or less.  
Windshield Washers  
To use the washer, push in on the washer knob on the end  
of the multifunction control lever and hold while spray is  
desired. If the washer knob is depressed while in the  
delay range, the wiper will operate for several seconds  
after the washer knob is released. It will then resume the  
intermittent interval previously selected. If the washer  
knob is pushed, for a period greater than 1 second, while  
in the OFF position, the wiper will wipe approximately  
three wipes, after the wash knob is released.  
3
WARNING!  
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield  
could lead to an accident. You might not see other  
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of  
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the  
windshield with defroster before and during wind-  
shield washer use.  
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system  
in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or  
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This  
rating information can be found on most washer fluid  
containers.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE  
TILT STEERING COLUMN  
WARNING!  
To tilt the column, push down on the lever below the turn  
signal control and move the wheel up or down, as  
desired. Push the lever back up to lock the column firmly  
in place.  
Tilting the steering column while the vehicle is  
moving is dangerous. Without a stable steering col-  
umn, you could lose control of the vehicle and have  
an accident. Adjust the column only while the ve-  
hicle is stopped. Be sure it is locked before driving.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95  
DRIVER ADJUSTABLE PEDALS  
Adjustment  
1. Position the driver seat so that you are at least 10  
inches (254 mm) away from the airbag located in the  
center of the steering wheel.  
3
2. Fasten and adjust the seatbelts.  
3. Move the adjustable pedal switch, located to the left of  
the steering column near the parking brake release, in the  
direction you desire to move the pedals.  
4. The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is in  
R (Reverse) or when the Speed Control is SET.  
The power adjustable accelerator and brake pedals allow  
the driver to establish a comfortable position relative to  
the steering wheel and pedals.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE  
CAUTION!  
Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals  
or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage  
to the pedal controls. Pedal travel may become  
limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in  
the adjustable pedals path.  
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL  
When engaged, this device takes over accelerator opera-  
tion at speeds greater than 35 mph (56 km/h). The  
controls are mounted on the steering wheel.  
To Activate  
Push the ON/OFF button to the ON position. In the  
instrument cluster, the word CRUISEilluminates when  
the system is on.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97  
To Set At A Desired Speed  
To Resume Speed  
When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, press  
and release the SET button. Release the accelerator and  
the vehicle will operate at the selected speed.  
To resume a previously set speed, push and release the  
RESUME button. Resume can be used at any speed above  
30 mph (50 km/h).  
To Deactivate  
To Vary The Speed Setting  
3
A soft tap on the brake pedal, normal braking, clutch  
pressure while slowing the vehicle, or pressing the CAN-  
CEL button will deactivate speed control without erasing  
the memory. Pushing the ON/OFF button to the OFF  
position or turning off the ignition erases the memory.  
When the speed control is on, speed can be increased by  
pressing and holding the ACCEL button. When the  
button is released, a new set speed will be established.  
Tapping the ACCEL button once will result in a speed  
increase of 2 mph (3 km/h). Each time the button is  
tapped, speed increases so that tapping the button three  
times will increase speed by three increments.  
WARNING!  
Tapping the COAST button once will result in a speed  
decrease of 1 mph (2 km/h). Each time the button is  
tapped, speed will decrease. For example, tapping the  
button 3 times will decrease the speed by 3 mph (6  
km/h).  
Leaving the Speed Control ON when not in use is  
dangerous. You could accidentally set the system to  
cause it to go faster than you want. You could lose  
control and have an accident. Always leave the  
system OFF when you arent using it.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE  
To decrease speed while the speed control is on, press  
and hold the COAST button. Release the button when the  
desired speed is reached, and the new speed will be set.  
Vehicles equipped with a 6speed-manual transmission  
should be operated in 5th gear or lower under the above  
conditions.  
To Accelerate For Passing  
Depress the accelerator as you would normally. When the  
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.  
WARNING!  
Speed Control can be dangerous where the system  
cant maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could  
go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose  
control. An accident could be the result. Dont use  
Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are  
winding, icy, snow-covered, or slippery.  
NOTE: When driving uphill, at elevations above 2,000  
feet (610 meters), or when the vehicle is heavily loaded  
the vehicle may slow below the SET speed. If the vehicle  
speed drops below (refer to the table below for the speed  
for your specific engine), the speed control will automati-  
cally disengage. If this happens, you can push down on  
the accelerator pedal to maintain the desired speed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99  
OVERHEAD CONSOLE  
Courtesy/Reading Lights  
The overhead console consists of the following features:  
In the middle of the console are two courtesy/reading  
lights.  
Both lights illuminate as courtesy lights when a door is  
opened, when the dimmer control is rotated to the  
courtesy light position (fully upward position), or when  
the UNLOCK button is pressed on the Remote Keyless  
Entry transmitter, if so equipped. These lights are also  
operated individually as reading lights by pressing the  
recessed area of the corresponding lens.  
3
NOTE: The courtesy/reading lights will remain on until  
the switch is pressed a second time, so be sure they have  
been turned off before leaving the vehicle. If the interior  
lights are left on after the vehicle is turned off, they will  
extinguish after 15 minutes.  
Courtesy/Reading Lights  
Compass/Temperature Mini-Trip Computer (CMTC)  
Universal Garage Door Opener  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE  
COMPASS/TEMPERATURE MINI-TRIP COMPUTER  
US/M Button  
This overhead console consists of the following:  
Courtesy Lights  
Compass/Temperature Mini-Trip Computer  
Universal Garage Door Opener  
This overhead console allows you to choose between a  
compass/temperature display and one of four trip con-  
ditions being monitored.  
Use this button to change the display from U.S. to metric  
measurement units.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101  
RESET Button  
Global Reset  
If the RESET button is pressed twice within 4 seconds  
while in any of the 3 resettable displays, the Global Reset  
will reset all 3 displays.  
Step Button  
3
Use this button to reset the following displays to zero:  
Average Fuel Economy  
Trip Odometer  
Elapsed time  
Use this button to choose or cycle through the four trip  
conditions.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE  
Average Fuel Economy (AVG ECO)  
When Distance To Empty = 0, the fuel gauge pointer will  
initially be on the left edge of the red Emarker. At this  
point (fuel gauge pointer on the left edge of the red E”  
marker) there is reserve fuel capacity, which corresponds  
to approximately 8% of tank volume. This reserve capac-  
ity was put in place to prevent the likelihood of custom-  
ers running out of fuel when operating at maximum load  
conditions in areas where there arent many gas stations.  
Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset. This  
display mode becomes less sensitive to instantaneous  
changes in fuel consumption as the number of total  
vehicle miles since the last reset increases. It is suggested  
that this mode be reset periodically for general operation  
or when driving conditions change significantly (for  
example, at the end of a trip or when a trailer is  
connected or disconnected) to make the displayed aver-  
age fuel economy a more meaningful number.  
NOTE: The Distance To Empty will remain equal to  
zero, until the vehicle runs out of fuel or is refueled.  
Distance To Empty (DTE)  
Ram SRT-10 fuel tank volume is as follows:  
Shows the estimated distance that can be travelled with  
the fuel remaining in the tank. The estimated distance is  
determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous  
and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel  
tank level.  
26 gallons  
Trip Odometer (ODO)  
This display shows the distance traveled since the last  
reset.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103  
Elapsed Time (ET)  
This display shows the accumulated ignition ON time  
since the last reset.  
WARNING!  
Even if the display still reads a few degrees above  
32°F ( 0°C), the road surface may be icy, particularly  
in woods or on bridges. Drive carefully under such  
conditions to prevent an accident and possible per-  
sonal injury or property damage.  
C/T Button  
3
Automatic Compass Calibration  
This compass is self-calibrating which eliminates the  
need to manually set the compass. When the vehicle is  
new, the compass may appear erratic and the CAL  
symbol will be displayed.  
After completing one 360° turn, with the vehicle traveling  
less than 5 mph (8 km/h), in an area free from large metal  
or metallic objects, the CAL symbol will turn off and the  
compass will function normally.  
Use this button to select a readout of the outside tem-  
perature and one of eight compass headings that indicate  
the direction in which the vehicle is facing.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE  
Manual Compass Calibration  
NOTE: To ensure proper compass calibration, make  
sure the compass variance is properly set before manu-  
ally calibrating the compass.  
If the compass appears erratic and the CAL symbol does  
not appear, you must manually put the compass into the  
Calibrationmode.  
To Put Into a Calibration Mode  
Turn on the ignition and set the display to Compass/  
Temperature.Press and hold the RESET button to  
change the display between VAR (compass variance) and  
CAL (compass calibration) modes. When the CAL sym-  
bol is displayed complete one 360 degree turn in an area  
free from large metal objects or power lines. The CAL  
symbol will turn off and the compass will function  
normally.  
Compass Variance is the difference between magnetic  
north and geographic north. In some areas of the country,  
the difference between magnetic and geographic north is  
great enough to cause the compass to give false readings.  
If this occurs, the compass variance must be set according  
to the Compass Variance Map.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105  
To set the variance: Turn the ignition ON and set the  
display to Compass/Temperature.Press the RESET  
button approximately five seconds. The last variance  
zone number will be displayed. Press the STEP button to  
select the new variance zone and press the RESET button  
to resume normal operation.  
3
Outside Temperature  
Because the ambient temperature sensor is located un-  
derhood, engine temperature can influence the displayed  
temperature, therefore, temperature readings are slowly  
updated when the vehicle speed is below 20 mph (30  
km/h) or during stop and go driving.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE  
GARAGE DOOR OPENER  
For additional information on HomeLink, call 1800–  
3553515, or on the internet at www.homelink.com.  
The HomeLinkUniversal Transceiver replaces up to  
three remote controls (hand held transmitters) that oper-  
ate devices such as garage door openers, motorized  
gates, or home lighting. It triggers these devices at the  
push of a button. The Universal Transceiver operates off  
your vehicles battery and charging system; no batteries  
are needed.  
WARNING!  
A moving garage door can cause injury to people and  
pets in the path of the door. People or pets could be  
seriously or fatally injured. Only use this transceiver  
with a garage door opener that has a stop and  
reversefeature as required by federal safety stan-  
dards. This includes most garage door opener mod-  
els manufactured after 1982. Do not use a garage  
door opener without these safety features it could  
cause injury or death. Call toll-free 18003553515  
or, on the Internet at www.homelink.com for safety  
information or assistance.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107  
Programming HomeLink  
NOTE: When programming a garage door opener, it is  
advised to park outside the garage. Some vehicles may  
require the ignition switch to be turned to the second (or  
accessories) position for programming and/or opera-  
tion of HomeLink. It is also recommended that a new  
battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of the  
device being programmed to HomeLink for quicker  
training and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency  
signal.  
3
1. Press and hold the two outer HomeLink buttons, and  
release only when the indicator light begins to flash (after  
20 seconds). Do not hold the buttons for longer than 30  
seconds and do not repeat step one to program a second  
and/or third hand-held transmitter to the remaining two  
HomeLink buttons.  
WARNING!  
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a danger-  
ous gas. Do not run the vehicles exhaust while  
training the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause seri-  
ous injury or death.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE  
NOTE: Some gate operators and garage door openers  
may require you to replace this Programming Step 3 with  
procedures noted in the Gate Operator/Canadian Pro-  
grammingsection.  
WARNING!  
Your motorized door or gate will open and close  
while you are training the Universal Transceiver. Do  
not train the transceiver if people or pets are in the  
path of the door or gate. A moving door or gate can  
cause serious injury or death to people and pets or  
damage to objects.  
4. The HomeLink indicator light will flash slowly and  
then rapidly after HomeLink successfully receives the  
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release  
both buttons after the indicator light changes from the  
slow to the rapid flash.  
2. Position the end of your hand-held transmitter 1-3  
inches (3-8 cm) away from the HomeLink buttons while  
keeping the indicator light in view.  
5. Press and hold the just trained HomeLink button and  
observe the indicator light. If the indicator light stays on  
constantly, programming is complete and your device  
should activate when the HomeLink button is pressed  
and released.  
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLink  
button that you want to train and the hand-held trans-  
mitter buttons. Do not release the buttons until step 4  
has been completed.  
NOTE: To program the remaining two HomeLink but-  
tons, begin with Programmingstep two. Do not repeat  
step one.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109  
If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds and  
then turns to a constant light, continue with Program-  
mingsteps 6-8 to complete the programming of a rolling  
code equipped device (most commonly a garage door  
opener).  
and, depending on the brand of the garage door opener  
(or other rolling code equipped device), repeat this  
sequence a third time to complete the programming.  
HomeLink should now activate your rolling code  
equipped device.  
3
6. At the garage door opener receiver (motor-head unit)  
in the garage, locate the learnor smartbutton. This  
can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is  
attached to the motor-head unit.  
NOTE: To program the remaining two HomeLink but-  
tons, begin with Programmingstep two. Do not repeat  
step one. For questions or comments, please contact  
HomeLink at www.homelink.com or 1-800-355-3515.  
7. Firmly press and release the learnor smartbutton.  
(The name and color of the button may vary by manu-  
facturer.)  
Canadian Programming/Gate Programming  
Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter sig-  
nals to time-out(or quit) after several seconds of  
transmission which may not be long enough for  
HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming.  
Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are  
designed to time-outin the same manner.  
NOTE: There are 30 seconds in which to initiate step  
eight.  
8. Return to the vehicle and firmly press, hold for two  
seconds and release the programmed HomeLink button.  
Repeat the press/hold/releasesequence a second time,  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE  
If you live in Canada or you are having difficulties  
programming a gate operator by using the Program-  
mingprocedures (regardless of where you live), replace  
Programming HomeLinkstep 3 with the following:  
etc.). For convenience, the hand-held transmitter of the  
device may also be used at any time. In the event that  
there are still programming difficulties or questions,  
contact HomeLink at: www.homelink.com or 1-800-355-  
3515.  
NOTE: If programming a garage door opener or gate  
operator, it is advised to unplug the device during the  
cyclingprocess to prevent possible overheating.  
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button  
while you press and release every two seconds (cycle)  
your hand-held transmitter until the frequency signal has  
successfully been accepted by HomeLink. (The indicator  
light will flash slowly and then rapidly.) Proceed with  
Programmingstep four to complete.  
Erasing HomeLink Buttons  
To erase programming from the three buttons (individual  
buttons cannot be erased but can be reprogrammed-  
note below), follow the step noted:  
Press and hold the two outer HomeLink buttons until  
the indicator light begins to flash-after 20 seconds.  
Release both buttons. Do not hold for longer that 30  
seconds. HomeLink is now in the train (or learning)  
mode and can be programmed at any time beginning  
with Programming- step 2.  
Using HomeLink  
To operate, simply press and release the programmed  
HomeLink button. Activation will now occur for the  
trained device (i.e. garage door opener, gate operator,  
security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting,  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111  
Reprogramming a Single HomeLink Button  
To program a device to HomeLink using a HomeLink  
button previously trained, follow these steps:  
This device complies with part 15 of FCC rules and with  
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the  
following conditions:  
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink button. Do  
NOT release the button.  
This device may not cause harmful interference.  
3
This device must accept any interference that may be  
received including interference that may cause undes-  
ired operation.  
2. The indicator light will begin to flash after 20 seconds.  
Without releasing the HomeLink button, proceed with  
Programmingstep 2  
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly ap-  
proved by the party responsible for compliance could  
void the users authority to operate the equipment.  
For questions or comments, contact HomeLink at:  
www.homelink.com or 1-800-355-3515.  
Security  
HomeLinkis a trademark owned by Johnson Controls,  
If you sell your vehicle, be sure to erase the frequencies.  
Inc.  
To erase all of the previously trained frequencies, hold  
down both outside buttons until the green light begins to  
flash.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE  
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS  
CAUTION!  
The auxiliary electrical outlets can provide power for in  
cab accessories designed for use with the standard cigar  
lighterplugs.  
Direct Battery Fed Electrical Outlet(s) Use With  
Engine Off  
Many accessories that can be plugged in draw  
power from the vehicles battery, even when not  
in use (i.e. cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if  
plugged in long enough, the vehicles battery will  
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life  
and/or prevent engine starting.  
Accessories that draw higher power (i.e. coolers,  
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will discharge the  
battery even more quickly. Only use these inter-  
mittently and with greater caution.  
After the use of high power draw accessories, or  
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with  
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be  
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the  
generator to recharge the vehicles battery.  
One of the outlets is the cigar lighter outlet, located in the  
instrument panel below the ash receiver. This outlet has a  
fused direct feed from the battery so it receives power  
whether the ignition is ON or OFF.  
All accessories connected to this outlet should be re-  
moved or turned OFF when the vehicle is not in use to  
protect the battery against discharge.  
There is an additional Pop-Up Power Outlet in the center  
console ahead of the shifter lever. This outlet is powered  
only when the ignition switch is in the On or Accessories  
position.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113  
CIGAR LIGHTER AND ASH RECEIVER  
The ash receiver is opened and closed by pushing on the  
front surface of the receiver and then allowing the  
receiver to open.  
It heats when pushed in and pops out automatically  
when ready for use. To preserve the heating element, do  
not hold the lighter in the heating position.  
The cigar lighter is located in the instrument panel below  
the ash receiver.  
3
NOTE: This outlet has a fused direct feed from the  
battery so it receives power whether the ignition is ON or  
OFF. Leaving items such as cell phones in this outlet  
when the engine is not running will cause the battery to  
run down.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE  
CUPHOLDERS  
STORAGE  
Front Cupholders  
Center Storage Compartment  
The cupholders consist of two cupwells for passenger  
convenience.  
The center portion of the seat folds down to provide an  
armrest with unique storage compartments under the lid.  
Push the button on the front of the armrest to raise the  
cover. Inside there is a power outlet (if equipped),  
removable coin holder (if equipped), and two dividers to  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115  
configure the storage area into compartments. For ex-  
ample, compartments can be configured to hold a lap-top  
computer, a cellular telephone, CDs and miscellaneous  
items. The top of the cover provides a generous firm  
surface to serve as a desktop for your mobile office.”  
Storage and Seats  
Located in the center of the front 40/20/40 seat cushion  
below the armrest storage is a second storage compart-  
ment. This lower bin of the 20% seat has additional  
storage and for the vehicles equipped with the RDQ  
audio system (if equipped) it will also contain the sub-  
woofer audio amplifier in the lower bin.  
3
WARNING!  
This armrest is not a seat. Anyone seated on the  
armrest could be seriously injured during vehicle  
operation, or an accident. Only use the center  
seating position when the armrest is fully upright.  
In an accident, the latch may open if the total  
weight of the items stored exceeds about 10 lbs  
(4.5 kg). These items could be thrown about  
endangering occupants of the vehicle. Items  
stored should not exceed a total of 10 lbs (4.5 kg).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE  
There is also storage behind the seat. This storage area  
contains the 10 inch subwoofer (if equipped).  
PICKUP BOX  
The pickup box on your new Ram has many features  
designed for utility and convenience.  
NOTE: If you are installing a toolbox to the front of the  
pickup box, you must use Mopartoolbox brackets  
available from you dealer.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117  
You can carry wide building materials (sheets of ply-  
wood, etc.) by building a raised load floor. Place lumber  
across the box in the indentations provided above the  
wheel housings and in the bulkhead dividers to form the  
floor.  
WARNING!  
Care should always be exercised when operating a  
vehicle with unrestrained cargo. Vehicle speeds  
may need to be reduced. Severe turns or rough  
roads may cause shifting or bouncing of the cargo  
that may result in vehicle damage. If wide build-  
ing materials are to be frequently carried, the  
installation of a support is recommended. This  
will restrain the cargo and transfer the load to the  
pickup box floor.  
3
WARNING!  
The pickup box is intended for load carrying pur-  
poses only, not for passengers, who should sit in  
seats and use seat belts.  
If you wish to carry more than 600 lbs (272 kg) of  
material suspended above the wheelhouse, sup-  
ports must be installed to transfer the weight of  
the load to the pickup box floor or vehicle damage  
may result. The use of proper supports will permit  
loading up to the rated payload.  
Unrestrained cargo may be thrown forward in an  
accident causing serious or fatal injury.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE  
There are stampings in the sheet metal on the inner side  
bulkheads of the box in front of and behind both wheel  
housings. Place wooden boards across the box from side  
to side to create separate load compartments in the  
pickup box.  
Raise the right side of the tailgate until the right side  
pivot clears the hanger bracket. Slide the entire tailgate to  
the right to free the left side pivot. Remove the tailgate  
from the vehicle entirely. Do not carry the tailgate loose in  
the truck pickup box.  
There are four tie-down cleats bolted to the lower sides of  
the pickup box that can sustain loads up to 1000 lbs (450  
kg) total.  
SLIDE-IN CAMPERS  
DO NOT use slide-in campers on SRT-10 models.  
EASY-OFF TAILGATE  
Unlatch the tailgate and remove the support cables by  
releasing the lock tang from the pivot, then rotate and  
pull away from the box. Once the cables are free, move to  
the right side of the tailgate hinge bracket.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL  
CONTENTS  
Instruments And Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122  
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139  
CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139  
Compact Disc Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139  
Radio Operation And Cellular Phones . . . . . . . . 140  
Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141  
4
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123  
Instrument Cluster Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124  
Electronic Digital Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131  
6 - Disc CD Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132  
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132  
CD Player Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134  
Remote Sound System Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138  
Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145  
Operating Tips Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
122 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL  
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 123  
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
124 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL  
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTION  
Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not  
need towing, see your dealer for service as soon as  
possible.  
1. Malfunction Indicator Light  
This light is part of an onboard diagnostic system  
which monitors the emissions and engine control  
system. If the vehicle is ready for emissions  
testing the light will come on when the ignition is first  
turned on and remain on, as a bulb check, until the  
engine is started. If the vehicle is not ready for emissions  
testing the light will come on when the ignition is first  
turned on and remain on for 15 seconds, then blink for 5  
seconds, and remain on until the vehicle is started. If the  
bulb does not come on during starting, have the condi-  
tion investigated promptly.  
CAUTION!  
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause  
damage to the engine control system. It also could  
affect fuel economy and driveability.  
If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic converter  
damage and power loss will soon occur. Immediate  
service is required.  
If this light comes on and remains on while driving, it  
suggests a potential engine control problem and the need  
for system service.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 125  
2. Voltage Gauge  
When the engine is running, the gauge indicates  
CAUTION!  
the electrical system voltage. The pointer should  
stay within the normal range if the battery is charged.  
Typically this would be between 12 and 14 volts. If the  
pointer moves to either extreme left or right and remains  
there during normal driving, the electrical system should  
be serviced.  
Do not operate the engine with the tachometer  
pointer at high rpm for extended periods. Engine  
damage may occur.  
5. Airbag Indicator Light  
4
The indicator lights and remains lit for 6 to 8 seconds  
when the ignition is first turned on. If the light stays on,  
flickers or comes on while driving, have the airbag  
system checked by an authorized dealer.  
NOTE: If the gauge pointer moves to either extreme of  
the gauge, the Check Gagesindicator will illuminate  
and a single chime will sound.  
3. Turn Signal Indicators  
Lights in instrument cluster flash when outside turn  
signals are operating.  
6. High Beam Indicator  
This indicator shows that headlights are on high  
beam.  
4. Tachometer  
The tachometer indicates engine speed in revolutions per  
minute.  
7. Seat Belt Reminder Light  
When the ignition switch is first turned ON, this  
light will turn on for 5 to 8 seconds as a bulb check.  
During the bulb check, if the drivers seat belt is  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
126 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL  
unbuckled, a chime will sound. After the bulb check or  
when driving, if the driver seat belt remains unbuckled,  
the Seat Belt Warning Light will flash or remain on  
continuously. Refer to Enhanced Driver Seat Belt Re-  
minder System (BeltAlert)in the Occupant Restraints  
section for more information.  
NOTE: If the gauge pointer moves to either extreme of  
the gauge, the Check Gagesindicator will illuminate  
and a single chime will sound.  
10. CARGO LAMP  
The Cargo Lamp light will illuminate when the Cargo  
Lamp is activated from the dimmer control switch,  
located next to the headlight switch.  
8. Speedometer  
The speedometer shows the vehicle speed in miles per  
hour and/or kilometers per hour.  
11. DOOR AJAR  
The Door Ajar light will illuminate when any  
door is opened. When the ignition is ON the  
Door Ajar light will stay illuminated until the  
open door is closed. When the ignition is OFF  
the Door Ajar light will stay illuminated until the open  
door is closed or the battery saver feature automatically  
turns the light off.  
9. Oil Pressure Gauge  
The pointer should always indicate some oil pres-  
sure when the engine is running. Typically this  
would be between 40 and 100 psi. A continuous high or  
low reading, under normal driving conditions, may  
indicate a lubrication system malfunction. Immediate  
service should be obtained.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 127  
12. Temperature Gauge  
The temperature gauge indicates engine coolant  
CAUTION!  
temperature. Any reading within the normal  
range (less that the red zone) indicates that the  
cooling system is operating satisfactorily. The gauge  
needle will likely indicate a higher temperature when  
driving in hot weather, up mountain grades, in heavy  
traffic. If the needle rises into the red zone, stop the  
vehicle, shift into N (Neutral), and increase the engine  
idle speed for 2 to 3 minutes. If the temperature reading  
does not return to normal, shut your engine OFF and  
allow it to cool. Seek authorized service immediately. See  
Cooling System information in the section on Maintain-  
ing Your Vehicle.”  
Do not leave your vehicle unattended with the  
engine running as you would not be able to react to  
the temperature indicator if the engine overheats.  
13. Security  
4
The light will flash rapidly for approximately 16 seconds  
when the vehicle theft alarm is arming. The light will  
flash at a slower rate after the alarm is set. The security  
light will also come on for about two seconds when the  
ignition is first turned ON.  
14. CRUISE Light  
This indicator lights when the electronic speed control  
system is turned on.  
NOTE: If the gauge pointer moves to either extreme of  
the gauge, the Check Gagesindicator will illuminate  
and a single chime will sound.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
128 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL  
15. CHECK GAGES  
illuminate if the brake fluid is low, especially when  
braking or accelerating hard. This light will illuminate if  
the ABS indicator light has a malfunction. This light will  
flash if the engine is running and the parking brake is on.  
If the light remains on when the parking brake is  
released, it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system  
malfunction. In this case, the light will remain on until  
the cause is corrected.  
This light illuminates when the Voltmeter, Engine  
Oil Pressure or Engine Coolant Temperature  
gages indicate a reading either too high or too low.  
Examine the gages carefully, and follow the instructions  
above for each indicated problem.  
NOTE: When the ignition switch is turned to OFF, the  
Fuel Gage, Voltmeter, Oil Pressure and Engine Coolant  
Temperature gages may not show accurate readings.  
When the engine is not running, turn the ignition switch  
to ON to obtain accurate readings.  
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary  
and continued operation of the vehicle in this condition is  
dangerous.  
16. BRAKE System Warning Light  
Acceleration which causes the rear wheels to slip for a  
period of time may result in the red brake light illumi-  
nating and a brake switch code being set on ABS  
equipped vehicles. Depressing the brake pedal should  
extinguish the red brake light.  
This light illuminates when the ignition key is turned to  
the ON position and remains on for a few seconds. If the  
light stays on longer, it may be an indication that the  
parking brake has not been released. This light will  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 129  
17. ABS Warning Light  
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System  
The trip odometer shows individual trip mileage. To  
toggle between the odometer and the trip odometer,  
press the Odometer/Trip Odometer Button. To reset the  
Trip Odometer, press and hold the button while in trip  
mode, until the Trip Odometer resets.  
which is described elsewhere in this manual. This  
light will come on when the ignition key is turned to the  
ON position and may stay on for five seconds. If the ABS  
light remains on or comes on during driving, it indicates  
that the anti-lock portion of the brake system is not  
functioning and that service is required. See your autho-  
rized dealer immediately. The ABS light could also  
illuminate during loss of traction and remain illuminated  
until the brake pedal is pressed.  
NOTE: There is also an engine hour function. This  
indicates the number of hours the engine has been  
running. To display the engine hours perform the follow-  
ing: Place the ignition in RUN, but do not start the  
engine. With the odometer value displayed, hold the trip  
button down for a period of 6 seconds. The odometer will  
change to trip value first, then it will display the engine  
hour value. The engine hours will be displayed for a  
period of 30 seconds until the ignition is turned off or the  
engine is started.  
4
18. Odometer/Trip Odometer  
The odometer shows the total distance the vehicle has  
been driven.  
If the odometer reading is changed during repair or  
replacement, be sure to keep a record of the reading  
before and after the service so that the correct mileage can  
be determined.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
130 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL  
19. LAMP OUT Light  
23. Low Fuel Warning Light  
The LAMP OUT indicator in the instrument cluster alerts  
the driver if a defective bulb or wiring circuit is detected  
for most of the exterior lamps - headlamps, turn signal  
lamps, and stop lamps.  
Illuminates when the pointer is between Eand  
1/8 indication mark (approximately 15% of tank  
volume) on the fuel gauge. When the fuel gauge  
pointer is on E(equivalent to Distance To Empty [DTE]  
= 0 on the overhead console if so equipped) there is  
reserve fuel capacity, which corresponds to approxi-  
mately 8% of tank volume. This reserve capacity was put  
in place to prevent the likelihood of customers running  
out of fuel when operating at maximum load conditions  
in areas where there arent many gas stations.  
20. LOW WASH Light  
This light comes on when the washer fluid level falls  
below approximately 1/4 filled. The light will remain on  
until fluid is added and one minute has elapsed.  
21. Odometer/Trip Odometer Button  
Press this button to toggle between the odometer and the  
trip odometer display. Holding the button in resets the  
trip odometer reading when in trip mode.  
Ram SRT-10 fuel tank volume is as follows:  
26 gallons (98L)  
22. Fuel Gauge  
Shows level of fuel in tank when ignition switch is in the  
ON position.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 131  
24. Oil Temperature Gauge – if equipped  
When the ignition switch is in the OFFposition, or  
when the radio frequency is being displayed, time keep-  
ing is accurately maintained.  
This gauge shows the oil temperature. The gauge pointer  
will likely show higher temperatures when driving in hot  
weather, up mountain grades, or in heavy stop and go  
traffic. If this gauge reaches the red zone you should stop  
the vehicle, shift into Neutral, and increase the engine  
idle speed for 2 to 3 minutes. If the temperature reading  
does not return to normal, shut OFF your engine and  
allow it to cool.  
Clock Setting Procedure  
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ONor ACC”  
position. Using the point of a ballpoint pen or similar  
object, press either the H(Hour) or M(Minute)  
buttons on the radio. The display will show the time.  
4
NOTE: The oil temperature gauge will not illuminate  
the CHECK GAGES Light.  
2. Press the Hbutton to set hours or the Mbutton to  
set minutes. The time setting will increase each time you  
press a button.  
ELECTRONIC DIGITAL CLOCK  
The clock and radio each use the display panel built into  
the radio. A digital readout shows the time in hours and  
minutes whenever the ignition switch is in the ONor  
ACCposition.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
132 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL  
SALES CODE RBQAM/FM STEREO RADIO  
WITH 6 - DISC CD CHANGER  
NOTE: Power to operate the radio is controlled by the  
ignition switch. It must be in the ON or ACC position to  
operate the radio.  
Mode  
Press the MODE button repeatedly to select between AM,  
FM, the CD changer and Sirius Satellite Radio(if  
equipped). The display will show ST when a stereo  
station is received.  
To select Sirius Satellite Radio(if equipped), press the  
MODE button until the word SIRIUS appears. The fol-  
lowing will be displayed in this order: After three sec-  
onds, the current channel name and number will be  
displayed for five seconds. The current program type and  
channel number will then be displayed for five seconds.  
The current channel name and number will then be  
displayed until an action occurs. CDs may remain in the  
player while in the Satellite Radio mode.  
Radio Operation  
Power/Volume Control  
Press the PWR/VOL control to turn the radio on. Turn  
the volume control clockwise to increase the volume.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 133  
Seek  
Fade  
Press and release the SEEK button to search for the next  
station in either the AM or FM mode. Press the top of the  
button to seek up and the bottom to seek down. The  
radio will remain tuned to the new station until you  
make another selection. Holding the button in will by-  
pass stations without stopping until you release it.  
The Fade control provides for balance between the front  
and rear speakers. Press the FADE button in and it will  
pop out. Adjust the balance and push the button back in.  
Tone Control  
The tone controls affect the Bass and Treble frequency  
bands. Each is controlled by a slider control with a detent  
at the mid position. Moving a control up or down  
increases or decreases amplification of the band. The mid  
position provides a balanced output.  
4
Tune  
Press the TUNE control up or down to increase or  
decrease the frequency. If the button is pressed and held,  
the radio will continue to tune until the button is  
released. The frequency will be displayed and continu-  
ously updated while the button is pressed.  
To Set The Radio Push-Button Memory  
When you are receiving a station that you wish to  
commit to push-button memory, press the SET RND  
button. SET 1 will show in the display window. Select the  
16button you wish to lock onto this station and press  
and release that button. If a button is not selected within  
Balance BAL  
The Balance control adjusts the left-to-right speaker bal-  
ance. Press the BAL button in and it will pop out. Adjust  
the balance and push the button back in.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
134 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL  
5 seconds after pressing the SET RND button, the station  
will continue to play but will not be locked into push-  
button memory.  
General Information  
This radio complies with Part 15 of FCC rules and with  
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the  
following conditions:  
You may add a second station to each push-button by  
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press  
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display  
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in  
both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM  
stations to be locked into push-button memory. The  
stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by  
pressing the corresponding push-button twice. Every  
time a preset button is used, a corresponding button  
number will be displayed.  
1. This device may not cause harmful interference,  
2. This device must accept any interference received,  
including interference that may cause undesired opera-  
tion.  
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressively ap-  
proved by the party responsible for compliance could  
void the users authority to operate the equipment.  
CD Player Operation  
Time Button  
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC  
position and the Power / Volume control pushed ON  
before the CD player will operate.  
Press the TIME button to change the display between  
radio frequency and time.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 135  
Inserting The Compact Disc  
CAUTION!  
show the disc number, the track number, and index time  
in minutes and seconds. Play will begin at the start of  
track 1.  
LOAD/ EJT — Load  
3
This CD player will accept 4 4 inch (12 cm) discs  
Press the LOAD/ EJT button and the button with the  
corresponding number where the CD is being loaded.  
After the radio displays loadinsert the CD into the  
player.  
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the  
CD player mechanism.  
4
You may either insert or eject a disc with the radio OFF.  
Radio display will show loadingwhen it is being  
loaded.  
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio  
OFF, the display will show the time of day. If you insert  
a disc with the ignition OFF, the display will show the  
time of day for about 5 seconds, then go out.  
LOAD / EJT — Eject  
Press the LOAD/ EJT button and the button with the  
corresponding number where the CD was loaded and the  
disc will unload and move to the entrance for easy  
removal.  
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio  
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and  
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will  
Radio display will show ejectingwhen it is being  
ejected.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
136 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL  
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within  
15 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,  
the radio will continue to play the non-removed CD. If  
the CD is removed and there are other CDs in the radio,  
the radio will play the next CD. If the CD is removed and  
there are no other CDs in the radio, the radio will return  
to the last selected AM or FM mode.  
FF/TUNE/RW  
Press FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will begin to  
fast forward until FF is released. The RW ( Reverse)  
button works in a similar manner.  
Random Play SET / RND  
Press the RND button while the CD is playing to activate  
Random Play. This feature plays the tracks on the disc in  
random order to provide an interesting change of pace.  
The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.  
Seek  
Press the SEEK button to move to the next randomly  
selected track.  
Press the top of the SEEK button for the next selection on  
the CD. Press the bottom of the button to return to the  
beginning of the current selection, or return to the  
beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the  
first second of the current selection.  
Press TUNE FF to fast forward through the tracks. Press  
the FF button a second time to stop the fast forward  
feature. If TUNE RW is pressed, the current track will  
reverse to the beginning of the track and begin playing.  
Scan  
Press the SET / RND button a second time to stop  
Random Play.  
Press the Scan button to scan through each track on the  
CD currently playing.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 137  
PTY (Program Type) Button  
Program Type  
Foreign Language  
News  
Nostalgia  
Oldies  
Radio Display  
Language  
News  
Nostalga  
Oldies  
Persnlty  
Public  
Pressing this button once will turn on the PTY mode for  
5 seconds. If no action is taken during the 5 second time  
out the PTY icon will turn off. Pressing the PTY button  
within 5 seconds will allow the program format type to  
be selected. Many radio stations do not currently broad-  
cast PTY information.  
Personality  
Public  
4
Toggle the PTY button to select the following format types:  
Rhythm and Blues  
Religious Music  
Religious Talk  
Rock  
Soft  
Soft Rock  
Soft Rhythm and Blues  
Sports  
Talk  
Top 40  
Weather  
R & B  
Rel Musc  
Rel Talk  
Rock  
Program Type  
Adult Hits  
Radio Display  
Adlt Hit  
Classical  
Classic Rock  
College  
Classicl  
Cls Rock  
College  
Country  
ALERT!  
Test  
Soft  
Soft Rck  
Soft R&B  
Sports  
Talk  
Top 40  
Weather  
Country  
Emergency  
Emergency Test  
Information  
Jazz  
Inform  
Jazz  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
138 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL  
By pressing the SEEK button when the PTY icon is  
displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency  
station with the same selected PTY name. The PTY  
function only operates when in the FM mode.  
Time  
Press the TIME button to change the display from  
elapsed CD playing time to time of day.  
REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS  
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear  
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to  
access the switches.  
The radio display will flash SEEKand the selected PTY  
program type when searching for the next PTY station. If  
no station is found with the selected PTY program type,  
the radio will return to the last station.  
If a preset button is activated while in the PTY (Program  
Type) mode, the PTY mode will be exited and the radio  
will tune to the preset station.  
By pressing the SCAN button when the PTY icon is  
displayed, the radio will stop at every PTY station on the  
band and list each corresponding program type in the  
radio display.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 139  
The right hand control is a rocker type switch with a  
button in the center. Pressing the top of the switch will  
increase the volume and pressing the bottom of the  
switch will decrease the volume. The center button of the  
right hand control will allow you to change the mode.  
CD Player  
Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next  
track on the CD. Pressing the bottom of the switch once  
will go to the beginning of the current track or to the  
beginning of the previous track if it is within one second  
after the current track begins to play.  
The left hand control is a rocker type switch with a push  
button in the center. The function of the left hand control  
is different depending on which mode you are in.  
If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the  
second track, three times, it will play the third, etc.  
4
The following describes the left hand control operation in  
each mode.  
The button in the center of the left hand switch has no  
function in this mode.  
Radio Operation  
COMPACT DISC MAINTENANCE  
To keep the compact discs in good condition, take the  
following precautions:  
Pressing the top of the left side switch will SEEK up for  
the next listenable station and pressing the bottom of the  
switch will SEEK down for the next listenable station.  
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the  
surface.  
The button located in the center of the left hand control  
will tune to the next pre-set station that you have  
programmed in the radio pre-set push-buttons.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
140 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL  
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,  
wiping from center to edge.  
RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES  
Under certain conditions, the operation of a cellular  
phone in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy perfor-  
mance from your radio. This condition may be lessened  
or eliminated by relocating the cellular phone antenna.  
This condition is not harmful to the radio. If your radio  
performance does not satisfactorily clearby the repo-  
sitioning of the antenna, it is recommended that the radio  
volume be turned down or off during cellular phone  
operation.  
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratch-  
ing the disc.  
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners,  
or antistatic sprays.  
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.  
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.  
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become  
too high.  
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particu-  
lar disc, it may be damaged, oversized, or have theft  
protection encoding. Try a known good disc before  
considering disc player service.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 141  
CLIMATE CONTROLS  
Air Conditioning with Dual Zone Temperature  
Control  
With the Dual Zone Temperature Control System, each  
front seat occupant can independently control the tem-  
perature of air coming from the outlets on their side of  
the vehicle.  
4
Air Conditioning Operation  
To turn on the Air Conditioning, set the fan control at any  
speed and press the snowflake button located on the  
control panel. Conditioned air will be directed through  
the outlets selected by the mode control. A light in the  
snowflake button shows that the air conditioning is on.  
Press the button a second time to turn the air condition-  
ing off.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
142 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL  
A/C Pushbutton  
Mode Control  
With the fan control in the ON posi-  
tion, pushing the A/C button turns on  
the air conditioning compressor. An  
indicator light on the button shows  
that the Air Conditioning compressor  
is on. Conditioned air is now directed  
through the mode outlets selected.  
Pushing the button a second time turns the compressor  
OFF.  
The mode control allows you to  
choose from several patterns of air  
distribution.  
NOTE: To improve your selection choices, the system  
allows you to operate at intermediate positions between  
the major modes. These intermediate positions are iden-  
tified by the small dots and give an even blend of both  
modes.  
Recirculation Pushbutton  
Pushing the Recirculation button al-  
lows interior air to recirculate continu-  
ously in any position except defrost  
and defrost/floor mode for rapid cool  
down of the interior. See Fast  
Cooldownlater in this section.  
Panel  
Outside air flows through the outlets located in the  
instrument panel. These outlets can be adjusted to  
direct the airflow.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 143  
Bi-Level  
Air flows through the outlets located in the instru-  
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in  
both Mix and Defrost or a blend of these modes, even if  
the A/C button has not been pressed. This dehumidifies  
the air to help dry the windshield.  
ment panel and those located on the floor.  
NOTE: There is a difference in temperature between the  
upper and lower outlets for added comfort. The warmer  
air goes to the floor outlets. This feature gives improved  
comfort during sunny but cool conditions.  
Blower Control  
The rotary knob on the left of  
the control panel is the  
blower control. Turn the knob  
clockwise to one of the four  
positions to obtain the blower  
speed you desire. To turn the  
blower off, turn the knob to  
the far left position.  
4
Heat  
Outside air flows primarily through the floor out-  
lets located under the instrument panel.  
Mix  
Outside air flows in equal proportions through the  
floor and defroster outlets.  
Defrost  
Outside air is primarily directed to the windshield  
through the defroster outlets located at the base of  
the windshield and side window demist outlets.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
144 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL  
Dual Zone Temperature Control  
Electric Rear Window Defroster and Heated  
Sideview Mirrors If Equipped  
The Electric Rear Window Defroster and Heated  
side view mirrors are activated by pressing the  
heated grid button, located on the Climate Control panel,  
with the ignition On. Turning Off the ignition will  
deactivate the Electric Rear Window Defroster and  
Heated side view mirrors feature. These features also  
turn off after activation, when 15 minutes have elapsed.  
To reactivate, simply press the button again.  
Circulation  
The cab is designed with features to promote outside air  
circulation. There are grilles in the cab back panel. These  
are air exhausters that provide the means for regular  
exchange of cab air.  
Use this control to regulate the temperature of the air  
inside the passenger compartment. This is accomplished  
by having separate temperature control slides for both  
the driver and front passenger. The blue area of the scale  
indicates cooler temperatures while the red area indicates  
warmer temperatures.  
Side window demisters direct air flow specifically to the  
window glass to help prevent interior fogging of the  
glass. They are located in the extreme outside upper  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 145  
edges of the instrument panel. The demisters also pro-  
vide extra air ducts for circulation. They are in operation  
whenever the Floor, Mix or Defrost modes are in use.  
reached, choose a mode position and adjust the tempera-  
ture control slide and blower speed as necessary to  
maintain comfort. For high humidity conditions it may  
be necessary to remain in the Recirculation mode to  
maintain comfort.  
NOTE: When you turn off the engine you may hear a  
hissing sound from under the hood for a short period of  
time. This is a normal condition that occurs if the air  
conditioning system has been on. It is not an indication of  
a problem with the air conditioning system.  
Window Fogging  
Windows will fog on the inside when the humidity inside  
the vehicle is high. This often occurs in mild or cool  
temperatures when its rainy or humid. In most cases  
turning on the Air-conditioning (pressing the snowflake  
button) will clear the fog. Adjust the temperature control,  
air direction and blower speed to maintain comfort.  
4
Operating Tips  
Fast Cooldown  
For a fast cooldown, turn the blower fan rotary knob to  
the extreme right position, turn the mode control to the  
panel fresh position, press the snowflake button to turn  
on the air conditioning, and drive with the windows  
open for the first few minutes. Once the hot air has been  
expelled, close the windows and press the Recirculation  
pushbutton. When a comfortable condition has been  
As the temperature gets colder it may be necessary to  
direct air onto the windshield by using MIX Mode  
position on the control. Adjust the temperature control  
and blower speed to maintain comfort. Higher blower  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
146 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL  
speeds will reduce fogging. Interior fogging on the  
windshield can be quickly removed by selecting the  
defrost mode.  
encountered, operate the transmission in a lower gear to  
increase engine RPM, coolant flow and fan speed. When  
stopped in heavy traffic, it may be necessary to shift into  
NEUTRAL and depress the accelerator slightly for fast  
idle operation to increase coolant flow and fan speed.  
Regular cleaning of the inside of the windows with a  
non-filming cleaning solution (vinegar and water works  
very well) will help prevent contaminates (cigarette  
smoke, perfumes, etc.) from sticking to the windows.  
Contaminates increase the rate of window fogging.  
NOTE: On models equipped with Diesel engines, the  
idle speed will automatically increase to 1000 rpm at  
elevated coolant temperatures to improve engine cooling.  
Summer Operation  
Your air conditioning system is also equipped with an  
automatic recirculation system. When the system senses  
a heavy load or high heat conditions, it may use partial  
Recirculation A/C mode to provide additional comfort.  
Air conditioned vehicles must be protected with a high  
quality antifreeze coolant during summer to provide  
proper corrosion protection and to raise the boiling point  
of the coolant for protection against overheating. A 50 %  
concentration is recommended. Refer to Recommended  
Fluids and Genuine Parts for the proper coolant type.  
Winter Operation  
When operating the system during the winter months,  
make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the  
windshield, is free of ice, slush, snow, or other obstruc-  
tions.  
When using the air conditioner in extremely heavy traffic  
in hot weather especially when towing a trailer, addi-  
tional engine cooling may be required. If this situation is  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 147  
Operating Tips Chart  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
STARTING AND OPERATING  
CONTENTS  
Ignition/Starter Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152  
Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152  
Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152  
On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152  
ACC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152  
Key Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152  
Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153  
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153  
If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154  
After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155  
Transmission Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155  
Manual Transmission 6-Speed . . . . . . . . . . 155  
Limited-Slip Differential . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157  
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158  
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160  
Brake Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
150 STARTING AND OPERATING  
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162  
Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163  
Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163  
Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . . 166  
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . 167  
TiresGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171  
Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171  
Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172  
Radial-Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175  
Compact Spare Tire If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 175  
Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176  
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177  
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177  
Alignment And Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178  
Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179  
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180  
Tire Rotation Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . 181  
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182  
Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182  
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183  
MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183  
Sulfur In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184  
Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184  
Fuel System Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184  
Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
STARTING AND OPERATING 151  
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186  
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186  
Catalytic Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188  
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189  
Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189  
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192  
Snowplow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192  
Dodge SRT-10 Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192  
Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193  
Equipment Identification Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
152 STARTING AND OPERATING  
IGNITION/STARTER SWITCH  
OFF  
Unlocks the steering wheel (if equipped with locking  
wheel).  
ON  
This is the normal running position.  
ACC  
Allows the electrical accessories to be used when the  
engine is not running.  
Manual Transmission Key Release Button  
To remove the key on vehicles equipped with manual  
transmissions, turn the key to the Lock position and press  
the button to remove the ignition key.  
LOCK  
Key Reminder  
An alarm will sound to remind you if the key is left in the  
ignition and the drivers door is opened.  
Engages the steering wheel lock (if equipped) when the  
steering wheel is turned.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
STARTING AND OPERATING 153  
STARTING PROCEDURES  
The starter should not be operated for more than 15-  
second intervals. Waiting a few seconds between such  
intervals will protect the starter from overheating.  
Manual Transmission  
Apply the parking brake, place the gearshift control lever  
in NEUTRAL and depress the clutch pedal to the floor  
before starting the vehicle. This vehicle is equipped with  
a clutch interlocking ignition system. It will not start  
unless the clutch is fully depressed. Place the ignition  
switch in the ON position.  
5
Start Button Locator  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
154 STARTING AND OPERATING  
Normal starting of either a cold or a  
warm engine does not require pump-  
ing or depressing the accelerator  
pedal. To start the vehicle, turn the key  
to the ON position and press the red  
CAUTION!  
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank the  
engine for more than 15seconds at a time. Wait 10 to  
15 seconds before trying again.  
ENGINE START button located on the  
instrument panel and release when the  
If the engine has been flooded, it may start to run, but not  
have enough power to continue running when the key is  
released. If this occurs, continue cranking with the accel-  
erator pedal pushed all the way to the floor. Release the  
accelerator pedal and the key once the engine is running  
smoothly.  
engine starts. If the engine fails to start within 10 seconds,  
turn the key to the OFF position, wait 5 seconds, then  
repeat the normal starting procedure.  
If Engine Fails To Start  
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the  
normal starting procedure, it may be flooded. Push the  
accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it there  
while cranking the engine. This should clear any excess  
fuel in case the engine is flooded.  
If the engine shows no sign of starting after two 15  
second periods of cranking with the accelerator pedal  
held to the floor, the normal starting procedure should be  
repeated.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
STARTING AND OPERATING 155  
WARNING!  
WARNING!  
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into the  
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start  
the vehicle. This could result in a flash fire causing  
serious personal injury.  
Do not leave children or animals inside parked  
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build up may  
cause serious injury or death.  
TRANSMISSION SHIFTING  
After Starting  
The idle speed is automatically controlled and will de-  
crease as the engine warms up.  
Manual Transmission 6-Speed  
5
NOTE: The parking brake should be engaged before  
leaving the vehicle, especially on an incline.  
CAUTION!  
This model is equipped with a clutch interlocking igni-  
tion system. The clutch pedal must be fully depressed to  
start the vehicle.  
Long periods of engine idling, especially at high  
engine speeds can cause excessive exhaust tempera-  
tures which can damage your vehicle. Do not leave  
your vehicle unattended with the engine running.  
Fully depress the clutch pedal before shifting gears. As  
you release the clutch pedal, lightly depress the accelera-  
tor pedal. When launching a stationary vehicle, keep the  
engine speed low until the clutch is fully engaged.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
156 STARTING AND OPERATING  
Damage to the clutch can re-  
You should use low gear when starting from a standing  
position if under a heavy load.  
sult from starting in 2nd or  
3rd gear with a loaded ve-  
hicle. Use each gear in nu-  
merical order do not skip a  
gear.  
To shift into Reverse, come to a complete stop. Depress  
the clutch and pause briefly to allow the gear train to  
stop. Move the shift lever from the Neutral position  
straight across and up into Reverse.  
Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal, or  
attempt to hold the vehicle on a hill with the clutch pedal  
partially engaged, as this will cause abnormal wear on  
the clutch.  
For improved clutch life, all six forward gears should be  
used. For steady highway driving with light acceleration,  
6th gear is recommended. When shifting from 4th to 5th  
gear, apply side effort away and forward without push-  
ing hard enough to engage Reverse gear. Shifting from  
5th to 6th requires the same side effort or the lever will  
return to center resulting in a shift into 4th gear and  
damage the transmission, clutch, or engine.  
Recommended Shift Speeds  
To use your manual transmission for fuel economy it  
should be upshifted as listed below. Shift at the vehicle  
speeds listed for acceleration. Earlier upshifts during  
cruise conditions (relatively steady speeds) will result in  
increased fuel economy, and may be used as indicated.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
STARTING AND OPERATING 157  
MANUAL TRANSMISSION  
RECOMMENDED SHIFT SPEEDS  
CAUTION!  
When descending a hill, be very careful to downshift  
one gear at a time to prevent overspeeding the  
engine which can cause valve damage.  
1-2  
15  
(24)  
2-3  
25  
(40)  
3-4  
40  
(65)  
4-5  
45  
(72)  
5-6  
50  
(80)  
MPH  
(km/h)  
Higher upshift speeds may be used to obtain a desired  
acceleration rate.  
LIMITED-SLIP DIFFERENTIAL  
The limited-slip differential provides additional traction  
on snow, ice, mud, sand and gravel, particularly when  
there is a difference between the traction characteristics  
of the surface under the right and left rear wheels. During  
normal driving and cornering, the limited-slip unit per-  
forms similarly to a conventional differential. On slip-  
pery surfaces, however, the differential delivers more of  
the driving effort to the rear wheel having the better  
traction.  
Downshifting  
5
Moving from a high gear down to a lower gear is  
recommended to preserve brakes when driving down  
steep hills. In addition, downshifting at the right time  
provides better acceleration when you desire to resume  
speed. Downshifting progressively. Do not skip gears to  
avoid overspeeding the engine and clutch. For accelera-  
tion at speeds less than 15 mph (25 km/h), 2nd gear is  
recommended.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
158 STARTING AND OPERATING  
The limited-slip differential is especially helpful during  
slippery driving conditions. With both rear wheels on a  
slippery surface, a slight application of the accelerator  
will supply maximum traction. When starting with only  
one rear wheel on an excessively slippery surface, slight  
momentary application of the parking brake may be  
necessary to gain maximum traction.  
Care should be taken to avoid sudden accelerations when  
both rear wheels are on a slippery surface. This could  
cause both rear wheels to spin, and allow the vehicle to  
slide sideways on the crowned surface of a road or in a  
turn.  
PARKING BRAKE  
The foot operated parking brake is positioned below the  
lower left corner of the instrument panel. To release the  
parking brake, pull the parking brake release handle.  
WARNING!  
On vehicles equipped with a limited-slip differen-  
tial, never run the engine with one rear wheel off the  
ground, since the vehicle may drive through the rear  
wheel remaining on the ground. You could lose  
control of the vehicle.  
NOTE: The instrument cluster red brake warning light  
will come on and flash to indicate that the parking brake  
is applied. You must be sure that the parking brake is  
fully applied before leaving the vehicle.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
STARTING AND OPERATING 159  
WARNING!  
Always fully apply the parking brake when leav-  
ing your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage  
or injury. Also be certain to leave a manual  
transmission in Reverse or first gear. Failure to do  
so may allow the vehicle to roll and cause damage  
or injury.  
Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dan-  
gerous for a number of reasons. A child or others  
could be injured. Children should be warned not  
to touch the parking brake or the gear selector  
lever. Dont leave the keys in the ignition. A child  
could operate power windows, other controls, or  
move the vehicle.  
5
Be sure the parking brake is firmly set when parked and  
the gear shift lever is in the REVERSE position.  
Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged  
before driving, failure to do so can lead to brake  
problems due to excessive heating of the rear  
brakes.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
160 STARTING AND OPERATING  
When parking on a hill, turn the front wheels toward the  
curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an  
uphill grade.  
Brake Noise  
During normal operation of the brake system certain  
noises may be present from time to time. Occasional  
groanor squealnoises may occur during normal  
operation of the brake system which may not be indica-  
tive of a problem. These noises may be heard at any time  
the brakes are applied but may be more noticeable during  
the first few brake applications in the morning. Moisture,  
hot or cold temperature, dust, and or other debris may  
also contribute to the noise condition. Repeated or con-  
tinuous noises during braking may be an indication that  
the brake linings are worn and in need of replacement.  
The parking brake should always be applied whenever  
the driver is not in the vehicle.  
BRAKE SYSTEM  
If power assist is lost for any reason (for example,  
repeated brake applications with the engine off), the  
brakes will still function. However, you will experience a  
substantial increase in braking effort to stop the vehicle.  
If either the front or rear hydraulic systems lose normal  
capability, the remaining system will still function with  
some loss of overall braking effectiveness. This will be  
evident by increased pedal travel during application,  
greater pedal force required to slow or stop, and activa-  
tion of the BRAKE warning lamp and the ABS lamp (if  
equipped) during brake use.  
Four-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)  
This Anti-lock Brake System is designed to aid the driver  
in maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking  
conditions. The system operates with a separate com-  
puter to modulate hydraulic pressure to prevent wheel  
lockup and help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
STARTING AND OPERATING 161  
The systems pump motor runs during an ABS stop to  
provide regulated hydraulic pressure. The pump motor  
makes a low humming noise during operation. This is  
normal.  
ABS Warning Light  
The Anti-lock Brake System includes an amber warning  
light. When the light is illuminated, the Anti-lock Brake  
System is not functioning. The system reverts to standard  
non-anti-lock brakes.  
When you are in a severe braking condition involving  
use of the Anti-lock Brake System, you will experience  
some pedal drop as the vehicle comes to a complete stop.  
This is the result of the system reverting to the base brake  
system and is normal.  
WARNING!  
Pumping of the anti-lock brakes will diminish their  
effectiveness and may lead to an accident. Pumping  
makes the stopping distance longer. Just press firmly  
on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or  
stop.  
5
Engagement of the Anti-lock Brake System may be  
accompanied by a pulsing sensation. You may also hear a  
clicking noise. These occurrences are normal, and indi-  
cate that the system is functioning.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
162 STARTING AND OPERATING  
POWER STEERING  
Your power steering system will provide mechanical  
steering capability if power assist is lost.  
WARNING!  
Anti-lock system (ABS) cannot prevent the natu-  
ral laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor  
can it increase braking or steering efficiency be-  
yond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle  
brakes and tires or the traction afforded.  
If for any reason the hydraulic pressure is interrupted, it  
will still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these  
conditions you will experience a substantial increase in  
steering effort.  
The ABS cannot prevent accidents, including  
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,  
following another vehicle too closely, or hydro-  
planing. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver  
can prevent accidents.  
The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must  
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous  
manner which could jeopardize the users safety  
or the safety of others.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
STARTING AND OPERATING 163  
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION  
Tire Markings  
European Metric tire sizing is based on European  
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have  
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with  
the section width. The letter Pis absent from this tire  
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H  
LT(Light Truck)-Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.  
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric  
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the  
letters LTthat are molded into the sidewall preced-  
ing the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.  
5
Temporary Spare tires are high pressure compact  
spares designed for temporary emergency use only.  
Tires designed to this standard have the letter T”  
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-  
tion. Example: T145/80D18 103M.  
NOTE:  
P(Passenger)-Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. design  
standards. P-Metric tires have the letter Pmolded  
into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Ex-  
ample: P215/65R15 95H.  
High Flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design  
standards and begins with the tire diameter molded  
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
164 STARTING AND OPERATING  
Tire Sizing Chart  
EXAMPLE:  
Size Designation:  
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards  
....blank....= Passenger car tire based on European design standards  
LT = Light Truck tire based on U.S. design standards  
T = Temporary Spare tire  
31 = Overall Diameter in Inches (in)  
215 = Section Width in Milimeters (mm)  
65 = Aspect Ratio in Percent (%)  
Ratio of section height to section width of tire.  
10.5 = Section Width in Inches (in)  
R = Construction Code  
Rmeans Radial Construction.  
Dmeans Diagonal or Bias Construction.  
15 = Rim Diameter in Inches (in)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
STARTING AND OPERATING 165  
EXAMPLE:  
Service Description:  
95 = Load Index  
A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry.  
H = Speed Symbol  
A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding  
to its load index under certain operating conditions.  
The maximum speed corresponding to the Speed Symbol should only be achieved un-  
der specified operating conditions. (ie. tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions and  
posted speed limits).  
5
Load Identification:  
....blank....= Absence of any text on sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) Tire  
Extra Load (XL) = Extra Load (or Reinforced) Tire  
Light Load = Light Load Tire  
C,D,E = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure  
Maximum Load Maximum Load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry.  
Maximum Pressure Maximum Pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this  
tire.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
166 STARTING AND OPERATING  
Tire Identification Number (TIN)  
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall  
tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on  
the outboard side then you will find it on the inboard side  
of the tire.  
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire  
however the date code may only be on one side. Tires  
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN including  
date code located on the white sidewall side of the tire.  
EXAMPLE:  
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301  
DOT = Department of Transportation  
This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire  
safety standards, and is approved for highway use.  
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location.(2 digits)  
L9 = Code representing the tire size.(2 digits)  
ABCD = Code used by tire manufacturer.(1 to 4 digits)  
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured.(2 digits)  
03 means the 3rd week.  
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured.(2 digits)  
01 means the year 2001.  
Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have 1 number to represent the year in  
which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
STARTING AND OPERATING 167  
Tire Loading and Tire Pressure  
Tire and Loading Information Placard  
Tire Placard Location  
NOTE: Some vehicles have a Tire and Loading Infor-  
mationplacard located on the drivers side Bpillar.  
5
This placard tells you important information about the,  
1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle  
2) the total weight your vehicle can carry  
3) the tire size designed for your vehicle  
4) the cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear  
and spare tires.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
168 STARTING AND OPERATING  
Loading  
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your  
vehicle, locate the statement The combined weight of  
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX  
lbs.on the Tire and Loading Information placard. The  
combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and  
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed  
the weight referenced here.  
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed  
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You  
will not exceed the tires load carrying capacity if you  
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size and cold tire  
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading  
Information placard and the Vehicle Loading section of  
this manual.  
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,  
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear  
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on  
GAWRs, vehicle loading and trailer towing, see the  
Vehicle Loading section of this manual.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
STARTING AND OPERATING 169  
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit  
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo  
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely  
exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity  
calculated in step 4.  
1. Locate the statement The combined weight of occu-  
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX poundson  
your vehicles placard.  
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your  
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this  
manual to determine how this reduces the available  
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.  
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and  
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.  
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas-  
sengers from XXX kilograms or XXX pounds.  
5
NOTE: The following table shows examples on how to  
calculate total load, cargo/luggage and towing capacities  
of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and  
number and size of occupants. This table is for illustra-  
tion purposes only and may not be accurate for the  
seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.  
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of  
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if XXX”  
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb.  
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo  
and luggage load capacity is 650 lb. (1400750 (5 x 150) =  
650 lb.)  
NOTE: For the following example the combined weight  
of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs. (392  
Kg).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
170 STARTING AND OPERATING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
STARTING AND OPERATING 171  
1. Safety—  
WARNING!  
WARNING!  
Overloading of your tire is dangerous. Overloading  
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and  
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the  
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never  
overload them.  
Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can  
cause accidents.  
Under inflation increases tire flexing and can result  
in tire failure.  
Over inflation reduces a tires ability to cushion  
shock. Objects on the road and chuck holes can cause  
damage that results in tire failure.  
TIRESGENERAL INFORMATION  
5
Tire Pressure  
Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob-  
lems. You could lose control of your vehicle.  
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and  
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary  
areas are affected by improper tire pressure:  
Over inflated or under inflated tires can affect  
vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in  
loss of vehicle control.  
Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle  
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right  
or left.  
Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-  
mended cold tire inflation pressure.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
172 STARTING AND OPERATING  
2. Economy—  
Some vehicles may have Supplemental Tire Pressure  
Information for vehicle loads that are less that the maxi-  
mum loaded vehicle condition. These pressure condi-  
tions will be found in the Supplemental Tire Pressure  
Informationsection of this manual.  
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear  
patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal  
wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for  
earlier tire replacement. Underinflation also increases tire  
rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consumption.  
3. Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability—  
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.  
Overinflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.  
Tire Inflation Pressures  
The proper cold tire inflation pressure for passenger cars  
is listed on either the face of the drivers door or the  
drivers side Bpillar. For vehicles other than passenger  
cars, the cold tire inflation pressures are listed on either  
the Bpillar, the Certification Label or in the Tire  
Inflation Pressures brochure in the glove compartment.  
BPILLAR  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
STARTING AND OPERATING 173  
The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as  
inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least  
once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to  
check tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgement  
when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look  
properly inflated even when they are underinflated.  
(1 km) after a 3 hour period. The cold tire inflation  
pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pres-  
sure molded into the tire side wall.  
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range  
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with  
temperature changes.  
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per  
12° F (7° C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind  
when checking tire pressure inside a garage especially in  
the winter.  
CAUTION!  
5
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al-  
ways reinstall the valve stem capif equipped. This  
will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the  
valve stem, which could damage the valve stem.  
Example: If garage temperature = 68° F (20° C) and the  
outside temperature = 32° F (0° C) then the cold tire  
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),  
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12° F (7° C) for this  
outside temperature condition.  
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always  
cold tire inflation pressure. Cold tire inflation pressure  
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not  
been driven for at least 3 hours, or driven less than 1mile  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
174 STARTING AND OPERATING  
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)  
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure  
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.  
WARNING!  
High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi-  
mum load is dangerous. The added strain on your  
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a  
serious accident. Dont drive a vehicle loaded to the  
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75  
mph (120 km/h).  
Tire Pressures for High Speed Operation  
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds  
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi-  
tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high  
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very  
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle  
loading may be required for high speed vehicle opera-  
tion. Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire  
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading  
and cold tire inflation pressures.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
STARTING AND OPERATING 175  
Radial-Ply Tires  
Compact Spare Tire If Equipped  
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use with  
radial tires. It is engineered to be used on your style  
vehicle only. Since this tire has limited tread life, the  
original tire should be repaired (or replaced) and rein-  
stalled at the first opportunity.  
WARNING!  
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires  
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle  
poorly. The instability could cause an accident. Al-  
ways use radial ply tires in sets of four (or 6, in case  
of trucks with dual rear wheels). Never combine  
them with other types of tires.  
WARNING!  
5
Temporary use spare tires are for emergency use  
only. With these tires, do not drive more than 50 mph  
(80 km/h). Temporary-use spare tires have a total  
tread life of 3,000 miles (4 800 km). Be sure to follow  
the warnings which apply to your spare. Failure to  
do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of  
vehicle control.  
Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in  
the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your  
authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
176 STARTING AND OPERATING  
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a  
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the  
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare.  
Tire Spinning  
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not  
spin your vehicles wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h).  
Do not install more than one compact spare tire/wheel  
on the vehicle at any given time.  
See the paragraph on Freeing A Stuck Vehicle in Section  
6 of this manual.  
WARNING!  
CAUTION!  
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-  
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam-  
age or failure. A tire could explode and injure  
someone. Do not spin your vehicles wheels faster  
than 35 mph (55km/h) when you are stuck. And dont  
let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the  
speed.  
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take  
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with the  
compact spare installed. Damage to the vehicle may  
result.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
STARTING AND OPERATING 177  
Tread Wear Indicators  
Many states have laws requiring tire replacement at this  
point.  
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires  
to help you in determining when your tires should be  
replaced.  
Replacement Tires  
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many  
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for  
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manu-  
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva-  
lent to the originals in size, quality and performance  
when replacement is needed (see the paragraph on tread  
wear indicators). Refer to the Tire and Loading Informa-  
tion placard for the size designation of your tire. The  
service description and load identification will be found  
on the original equipment tire. Failure to use equivalent  
replacement tires may adversely affect the safety, han-  
dling, and ride of your vehicle. We recommend that you  
contact your original equipment or an authorized tire  
dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifi-  
cations or capability.  
5
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread  
grooves and will appear as bands when the tread depth  
becomes 1/16 inch (2 mm). When the indicators appear  
in 2 or more adjacent grooves, the tire should be replaced.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
178 STARTING AND OPERATING  
WARNING!  
CAUTION!  
Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than  
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size  
may result in false speedometer and odometer read-  
ings.  
that specified for your vehicle. Some combina-  
tions of unapproved tires and wheels may change  
suspension dimensions and performance charac-  
teristics, resulting in changes to steering, han-  
dling, and braking of your vehicle. This can cause  
unpredictable handling and stress to steering and  
suspension components. You could lose control  
and have an accident resulting in serious injury or  
death. Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load  
ratings approved for your vehicle.  
Alignment And Balance  
Poor suspension alignment may result in:  
Fast tire wear.  
Uneven tire wear, such as feathering and one-sided  
wear.  
Never use a tire with a smaller load index or  
capacity, other than what was originally equipped  
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load  
index could result in tire overloading and failure.  
You could lose control and have an accident.  
Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having  
adequate speed capability can result in sudden  
tire failure and loss of vehicle control.  
Vehicle pull to right or left.  
Tires may also cause the vehicle to pull to the left or right.  
Alignment will not correct this condition. See your dealer  
for proper diagnosis.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
STARTING AND OPERATING 179  
Improper alignment will not cause vehicle vibration.  
Vibration may be a result of tire and wheel out-of-  
balance. Proper balancing will reduce vibration and  
avoid tire cupping and spotty wear.  
CAUTION!  
To avoid damage to your vehicle, tires or chains, observe  
the following precautions:  
Because of limited chain clearance between tires and  
other suspension components, it is important that  
only chains in good condition are used. Broken chains  
can cause serious vehicle damage. Stop the vehicle  
immediately if noise occurs that could suggest chain  
breakage. Remove the damaged parts of the chain  
before further use.  
SUPPLEMENTAL TIRE PRESSURE INFORMATION  
A light load vehicle condition is defined as two passen-  
gers {150 lbs (68 kg) each} plus 200 lbs (91kg) of cargo.  
Cold tire inflation pressures for a lightly loaded vehicle  
will be found on a Supplemental Tire Pressure Inflation”  
label located on the face of the drivers door or in the Tire  
Information Pressures pamphlet in the glove box.  
Install chains as tightly as possible and then retighten  
5
after driving about 1/2 mile (0.8 km).  
Do not exceed 45 mph (72 km/h).  
Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large  
TIRE CHAINS  
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.  
Use Class Schains on SRT10 models, or other traction  
Do not install tire chains on front wheels of 4x2  
vehicles.  
aids that meet SAE Type Sspecifications.  
Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pavement.  
Tire chain use is permitted only on the rear tires of  
SRT10 models.  
Observe the tire chain manufacturers instructions on  
method of installation, operating speed, and condi-  
tions for usage. Always use the lower suggested  
operating speed of the chain manufacturer if different  
than the speed recommended by the manufacturer.  
NOTE: Chains must be the proper size for the vehicle,  
as recommended by the chain manufacturer.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
180 STARTING AND OPERATING  
These cautions apply to all chain traction devices, includ-  
ing link and cable (radial) chains.  
SNOW TIRES  
Snow tires should be of the same size and type construc-  
tion as the front tires. Consult the manufacturer of the  
snow tire to determine any maximum vehicle speed  
requirement associated with the tire. These tires should  
always be operated at the vehicle maximum capacity  
inflation pressures under any load condition.  
Tire chain use is permitted only on the rear tires of  
SRT10 Models.  
NOTE: The use of class Schains is permitted on SRT–  
10 Models with the use of 17 x 8 steel wheels (part  
number 52113265AC) available from your authorized  
dealer.  
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid  
and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be  
poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states pro-  
hibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be  
checked before using these tire types.  
CAUTION!  
Do not use tire chains on the front wheels. There  
may not be adequate clearance for the chains and  
you are risking structural or body damage to your  
vehicle.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
STARTING AND OPERATING 181  
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS  
Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at  
different loads and perform different steering, driving,  
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at  
unequal rates, and develop irregular wear patterns.  
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.  
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with  
aggressive tread designs such as those on On/Off Road  
type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to main-  
tain mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to  
a smooth, quiet ride.  
5
Follow the recommended tire rotation frequency for your  
type of driving found in the Maintenance Schedules”  
Section of this manual. More frequent rotation is permis-  
sible if desired. The reasons for any rapid or unusual  
wear should be corrected prior to rotation being per-  
formed.  
NOTE: On Canadian vehicles only, if your Ram truck is  
equipped with All-Season type tires on the front and  
ON/OFF Road type tires mounted on the rear, do not use  
a front to back rotation pattern. Instead, rotate your tires  
side to side at the recommended intervals.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
182 STARTING AND OPERATING  
FUEL REQUIREMENTS  
Over 40 automobile manufacturers around the world  
have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifica-  
tions (the World Wide Fuel Charter, WWFC) to define  
fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions,  
engine performance, and durability for your vehicle. The  
manufacturer recommends the use of gasolines that meet  
the WWFC specifications if they are available.  
Your vehicle is designed to meet all emis-  
sion regulations and provide excellent fuel  
economy when using high quality pre-  
mium unleaded gasoline having an octane  
rating of 91 or higher.  
Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to  
your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at  
high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is  
required. Engine damage resulting from operating with a  
heavy spark knock may not be covered by the new  
vehicle warranty.  
Reformulated Gasoline  
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner  
burning fuel referred to as Reformulated Gasoline.  
Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates, and are spe-  
cially blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve  
air quality.  
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard  
starting, stalling and hesitations. If you experience these  
symptoms, try another brand of regulargasoline be-  
fore considering service for the vehicle.  
The manufacturer strongly supports the use of reformu-  
lated gasolines. Properly blended reformulated gasolines  
will provide excellent performance and durability of  
engine and fuel system components.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
STARTING AND OPERATING 183  
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends  
MMT In Gasoline  
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with mate-  
rials called oxygenates such as 10% alcohol, MTBE, ETBE  
or TAME. Oxygenates are required in some areas of the  
country during the winter months to reduce carbon  
monoxide emissions. Fuels blended with these oxygen-  
ates may be used in your vehicle.  
MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is  
blended into some gasoline to increase the octane. Gaso-  
lines blended with MMT offer no performance advantage  
beyond gasolines of the same octane number without  
MMT. Gasolines blended with MMT reduce spark plug  
life and reduce emission system performance in some  
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasolines  
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content  
of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,  
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether  
or not his/her gasoline contains MMT.  
CAUTION!  
5
DO NOT use gasolines containing METHANOL.  
Gasoline containing methanol may damage critical  
fuel system components.  
It is even more important to look for gasolines without  
MMT in Canada because MMT can be used at higher  
levels than are allowed in the United States. MMT is  
prohibited in Federal and California reformulated gaso-  
lines.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
184 STARTING AND OPERATING  
Sulfur In Gasoline  
Materials Added to Fuel  
Your vehicle may have been designed to meet California  
low emission standards on clean burning, low sulfur,  
California gasoline. Gasoline sold outside of California is  
allowed to have higher sulfur levels that may affect the  
performance of your vehicles catalytic converter. This  
may cause the Malfunction Indicator Light or Service  
Engine Soon Light to illuminate.  
All gasoline sold in the United States and Canada is  
required to contain effective detergent additives. The use  
of additional detergents or other additives is not needed  
under normal conditions.  
Fuel System Cautions  
CAUTION!  
The illumination of this light while operating on high  
sulfur gasoline does not necessarily mean your emission  
system control system is malfunctioning. The manufac-  
turer recommends that you try a different brand of  
unleaded gasoline having lower sulfur to determine if the  
problem is fuel related before returning your vehicle to  
an authorized dealer for service.  
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicles  
performance:  
The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.  
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance,  
damage the emission control system, and could result  
in loss of warranty coverage.  
NOTE: If the Malfunction Indicator light or Service  
Engine Soon light is flashing, immediate service is re-  
quired.  
An out-of-tune engine, or certain fuel or ignition  
malfunctions, can cause the catalytic converter to  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
STARTING AND OPERATING 185  
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or  
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or  
malfunctioning and may require immediate service.  
Contact your dealer for service assistance.  
Carbon Monoxide Warnings  
WARNING!  
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.  
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon  
monoxide poisoning:  
When pulling a heavy load or driving a fully loaded  
vehicle when the humidity is low and the temperature  
is high, use a premium unleaded fuel to help prevent  
spark knock. If spark knock persists, lighten the load,  
or engine piston damage may result.  
Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon  
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas which can kill.  
Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a  
garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the  
engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle is  
stopped in an open area with the engine running for  
more than a short period, adjust the ventilation system  
to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.  
5
The use of fuel additives which are now being sold as  
octane enhancers is not recommended. Many of these  
products contain high concentrations of methanol.  
Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems  
resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not  
the responsibility of the manufacturer and may not be  
covered under the New Vehicle Warranty.  
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control  
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed  
against you.  
Guard against carbon monoxide with proper mainte-  
nance. Have the exhaust system inspected every time  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
186 STARTING AND OPERATING  
the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions  
repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with all side  
windows fully open.  
NOTE: Tighten the gas cap until you hear a clicking”  
sound. This is an indication that the gas cap is properly  
tightened. Make sure that the gas cap is tightened each  
time the vehicle is refueled.  
ADDING FUEL  
NOTE: The fuel tank filler tube is about 2 inches (50  
mm) down from the opening. If fuel is poured from a  
portable container, the container should have a flexible  
nozzle long enough to extend into the fuel filler tube.  
WARNING!  
A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a  
portable container that is inside of a vehicle or on a  
truck bed. You could be burned. Always place gas  
containers on the ground while filling.  
CAUTION!  
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)  
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not top  
offthe fuel tank after filling.  
The gas cap is behind the fuel filler door. If the gas cap is  
lost or damaged, be sure the replacement cap is for use  
with this vehicle.  
NOTE: When the fuel nozzle clicksor shuts off, the  
fuel tank is full.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
STARTING AND OPERATING 187  
WARNING!  
CAUTION!  
Remove the fuel tank filler tube cap (gas cap)  
slowly to prevent fuel spray from the filler neck  
which may cause injury.  
Damage to the fuel system or emission control  
system could result from using an improper fuel  
tank filler tube cap (gas cap). A poorly fitting cap  
could let impurities into the fuel system.  
The volatility of some gasolines may cause a  
buildup of pressure in the fuel tank that may  
increase while you drive. This pressure can result  
in a spray of gasoline and/or vapors when the cap  
is removed from a hot vehicle. Removing the cap  
slowly allows the pressure to vent and prevents  
fuel spray.  
5
Never allow any lit smoking materials near the  
vehicles while removing the cap or filling the  
tank.  
Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine is  
running.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
188 STARTING AND OPERATING  
CATALYTIC CONVERTER  
CAUTION!  
The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel  
only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the  
catalyst as an emission control device. Under normal  
operating conditions, the catalytic converter will not  
require maintenance. However, you must keep the en-  
gine maintained to assure proper operation and prevent  
possible damage.  
Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your  
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In  
the event of engine malfunction, particularly involv-  
ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor-  
mance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Contin-  
ued operation of your vehicle with  
a
severe  
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,  
resulting in possible damage to the converter and  
vehicle.  
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control  
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed  
against you.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
STARTING AND OPERATING 189  
As with any vehicle, do not park or operate this vehicle in  
areas where combustible materials such as grass or leaves  
can come in contact with a hot exhaust system.  
Do not allow vehicle to run out of fuel.  
VEHICLE LOADING  
Certification Label  
A scorching odor may be detected if you continue to run  
a malfunctioning engine. The odor may indicate severe  
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, the  
vehicle should be stopped, the engine shut off and the  
vehicle allowed to cool. Service, including a tune-up to  
manufacturers specifications should be obtained imme-  
diately.  
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Admin-  
istration Regulations, your vehicle has a certification  
label affixed to the drivers side door or pillar.  
This label contains the month and year of manufacture,  
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight  
Rating (GAWR) front and rear, and Vehicle Identification  
Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is  
included on this label and indicates the Month, Day and  
Hour of manufacture. The bar code that appears on the  
bottom of the label is your Vehicle Identification Number  
(VIN).  
5
To minimize the possibility of catalyst damage:  
Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the  
vehicle.  
Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires  
disconnected or removed.  
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)  
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle  
including driver, passengers, vehicle, options and cargo.  
Do not idle the engine for prolonged periods during  
very rough idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
190 STARTING AND OPERATING  
The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and  
rear axle systems (GAWR). Total load must be limited so  
GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded.  
Tire Size  
This is the minimum allowable tire size for your vehicle.  
Replacement tires must be equal to the load capacity of  
this tire size.  
Payload  
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load  
weight a truck can carry, including the weight of the  
driver, all passengers, options and cargo.  
Rim Size  
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size  
listed.  
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)  
Inflation Pressure  
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front  
and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo  
area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded.  
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for  
all loading conditions up to full GAWR.  
Curb Weight  
Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in the  
system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle,  
springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles or suspension  
components sometimes specified by purchasers for in-  
creased durability does not necessarily increase the vehi-  
cles GVWR.  
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight  
of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full  
capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo  
loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight  
values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a  
commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are  
added.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
STARTING AND OPERATING 191  
Loading  
Improper weight distributions can have an adverse effect  
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way  
the brakes operate.  
The actual total weight and the weight of the front and  
rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined  
by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation.  
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commer-  
cial scale to insure that the GVWR has not been exceeded.  
The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should  
then be determined separately to be sure that the load is  
properly distributed over front and rear axle. Weighing  
the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the front  
or rear axles has been exceeded but the total load is  
within the specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted  
from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the  
specified weight limitations are met. Store the heavier  
items down low and be sure that the weight is distributed  
equally. Stow all loose items securely before driving.  
CAUTION!  
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the  
GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If  
you do, parts on your vehicle can break, or it can  
change the way your vehicle handles. This could  
cause you to lose control. Also overloading can  
shorten the life of your vehicle.  
5
An EXAMPLE of a loaded vehicle is shown in the  
following chart. Note that neither GVWR nor GAWR  
capabilities are exceeded. Overloading can cause poten-  
tial safety hazards and shorten service life.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
192 STARTING AND OPERATING  
NOTE:  
The weights shown in this chart are not  
TRAILER TOWING  
necessarily the weights for your vehicle. Also, the  
amount of load added to both the front and rear axles  
can be computed after the vehicle has been weighed  
both in its curb weightcondition, and in its loaded  
and ready for operationcondition.  
DO NOT tow a trailer with Dodge SRT-10 models.  
SNOWPLOW  
Dodge SRT-10 Models  
NOTE:  
DO NOT use Dodge SRT- 10 Models for  
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) 6500 LBS.  
snowplow applications.  
WARNING!  
Snowplows, winches, and other aftermarket equip-  
ment should not be added to the front end or your  
vehicle. The airbag crash sensors may be affected by  
the change in the front end structure. The airbags  
could deploy unexpectedly or could fail to deploy  
during a collision resulting in serious injury or  
death.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
STARTING AND OPERATING 193  
TRACTION  
CAUTION!  
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a  
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road  
surface. This is known as hydroplaning and may cause  
partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping  
ability. To reduce this possibility, the following precau-  
tions should be observed:  
Using this vehicle for snowplow applications can  
cause damage to the vehicle.  
WARNING!  
1. Slow down during rainstorms or when roads are  
slushy.  
Attaching a snowplow to this vehicle could ad-  
versely affect performance of the airbag system in an  
accident. Do not expect that the airbag will perform  
as described earlier in this manual  
5
2. Slow down if road has standing water or puddles.  
3. Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become  
visible.  
4. Keep tires properly inflated.  
5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and  
the car in front to avoid a collision in a sudden stop.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
194 STARTING AND OPERATING  
EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION PLATE  
The equipment Identification Plate is located on the hood  
inner surface.  
NOTE: Always refer to the Equipment Identification  
Plate When Ordering Parts.  
The following information about your vehicle is dis-  
played on this plate: Model, Wheelbase, Vehicle Identifi-  
cation Number, Truck Order Number, and code numbers  
with descriptions of all production and special equip-  
ment on the truck as shipped from the factory.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES  
CONTENTS  
Hazard Warning Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196  
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197  
Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198  
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198  
Removing The Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201  
Tire Changing Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202  
Hoisting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207  
Jump-Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208  
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211  
Towing A Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212  
6
(SRT10 Models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199  
Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
196 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES  
HAZARD WARNING LIGHTS  
The Hazard Warning switch is mounted on the top of the  
steering column as shown in the illustration.  
will flash off and on to warn oncoming traffic of an  
emergency. Push the button a second time to turn off the  
flashers.  
This is an emergency warning system and should not be  
used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your  
vehicle is disabled and is creating a safety hazard for  
other motorists.  
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the  
Hazard Warning lights will continue to operate even  
though the ignition switch is OFF.  
NOTE: With extended use, the Hazard Warning lights  
may discharge your battery.  
To engage the Hazard Warning lights, depress the button  
on the top of the steering column. When the Hazard  
Warning switch is activated, all directional turn signals  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 197  
ADDING FUEL  
WARNING!  
The fuel tank filler tube has a restriction about 2 inches  
(50 mm) inside the opening. If using a portable fuel  
container, it should have a flexible nozzle long enough to  
reach past the restriction.  
Remove the gas cap slowly to prevent fuel spray  
from the filler neck which may cause injury.  
The volatility of present gasolines may cause a build  
up of pressure in the fuel tank that may increase  
while you drive. This pressure can result in a spray  
of gasoline and/or vapors when you remove the cap  
from a hot vehicle. Removing the cap slowly allows  
the pressure to vent and prevents fuel spray.  
WARNING!  
A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a  
portable container that is in a vehicle or on a truck  
bed. You could be burned. Always place gas contain-  
ers on the ground while filling.  
Never allow any lit smoking materials near the  
vehicles while removing the cap or filling the tank.  
6
Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine is  
running.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
198 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES  
JACK LOCATION  
WARNING!  
Removal  
The jack is designed to use as a tool for changing  
tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the  
vehicle for service purposes, unless suitable sup-  
ports are placed under the vehicle as a safety mea-  
sure. The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level  
surface only. Avoid ice or slippery areas.  
The jack and jack tools are stored under the front passen-  
ger seat. Lift the flap on the side of the seat for access.  
Remove the jack and tools by removing the wing bolt and  
sliding the assembly from under the seat.  
WARNING!  
After using the jack and tools, always reinstall them  
in the original carrier and location. While driving  
you may experience, abrupt stopping, rapid accelera-  
tion, or sharp turns. A loose jack, tools, bracket or  
other objects in the vehicle may move around with  
force, resulting in serious injury.  
1500 Model Vehicles  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 199  
Reinstalling The Scissors-Type Jack And Tools  
(SRT10 Models)  
3. Fold the flap and roll the jack tool kit into a cylindrical  
package (in direction of arrows), and tie to the jack using  
the tie straps.  
1. Lower the jack all the way down by turning the jack  
turn-screw until the jack is snug.  
2. Position the jack and tool bag (unrolled). Make sure  
the lug wrench is under the jack near the jack turn-screw.  
6
Folding Flap and Rolling Bag  
Turn Screw and Lug  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
200 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES  
Jack and Tools Tied  
Tying Bag to Jack with Straps  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 201  
4. Place the jack and tools in the storage position holding  
the jack by the jack turn-screw, slip the jack and tools  
under seat so that the bottom slot engages into the  
fastener on the floor and then secure to the floor pan  
using the wing bolt.  
CHANGING A FLAT TIRE  
Removing The Spare Tire  
Remove the spare tire before attempting to jack the truck.  
Attach the wheel wrench to the jack extension tube. Insert  
the tube through the access hole between the lower  
tailgate and the top of the bumper and into the winch  
mechanism tube. Rotate the wheel wrench handle coun-  
terclockwise until the spare tire is on the ground with  
enough cable slack to allow you to pull it out from under  
the vehicle. When the spare is clear, tilt the retainer at the  
end of the cable and pull it through the center of the wheel.  
6
1500 Model Vehicles  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
202 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES  
Tire Changing Procedure  
WARNING!  
Getting under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The  
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You  
could be crushed. Never get any part of your body  
under a vehicle that is on a jack. Never start or run  
the engine while the vehicle is on a jack. If you need  
to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a service  
center where it can be raised on a lift.  
It is recommended that you stow the flat or spare to  
avoid tangling the loose cable.  
Do not raise this vehicle using a bumper jack. The jack is  
designed as a tool for changing tires on this vehicle only.  
It is not recommended that the jack be used for service  
purposes or to lift more than one wheel at a time.  
NOTE: The winch mechanism is designed for use with  
the jack extension tube only. Use of an air wrench or other  
power tools is not recommended and can damage the  
winch.  
Preparations  
Park the vehicle on a firm level surface, avoiding ice or  
slippery areas. Set the parking brake and place the gear  
selector in REVERSE (manual transmission).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 203  
Instructions  
WARNING!  
WARNING!  
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the  
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off  
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when  
operating the jack or changing the wheel.  
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to  
help prevent personal injury or damage to your  
vehicle:  
Always park on a firm, level surface as far from  
the edge of the roadway as possible before raising  
the vehicle.  
Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to  
be raised.  
Apply the parking brake firmly before jacking.  
Never start the engine with the vehicle on a jack.  
Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on  
a jack.  
Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack.  
Only use the jack in the positions indicated.  
If working on or near a roadway, be extremely  
careful of motor traffic.  
Turn on the Hazard Warning Flasher.  
Block both the front and rear  
of the wheel diagonally oppo-  
site the jacking position. For  
example, if the right front  
wheel is being changed, block  
the left rear wheel.  
6
Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the  
vehicle is being jacked.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
204 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES  
1. Remove the spare wheel, jack, and tools from storage.  
When changing a front wheel, place the scissors jack  
under the rear portion of the lower control arm as  
shown below.  
2. Using the wheel wrench, loosen, but do not remove,  
the wheel nuts by turning them counterclockwise one  
turn while the wheel is still on the ground.  
3. Placement of the Jack:  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 205  
Operate the jack using the jack drive tube and the  
wheel wrench. The tube extension, may be used, but  
is not required.  
Connect the jack tube extension and wheel wrench.  
Before raising the wheel off the ground, make sure  
that the jack will not damage surrounding truck  
parts and adjust the jack position as required.  
When changing a rear wheel, assemble the jack  
drive tube to the jack and connect the drive tube to  
the extension tube. Place the jack under the axle  
between the spring and the shock absorber with the  
drive tubes extending to the rear.  
4. By rotating the wheel wrench clockwise, raise the  
vehicle until the wheel just clears the surface.  
WARNING!  
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make  
the vehicle unstable and cause an accident. It could  
slip off the jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the  
vehicle only enough to remove the tire.  
6
5. Remove the wheel nuts and pull the wheel off. Install  
the spare wheel and wheel nuts. Lightly tighten the nuts.  
To avoid risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not  
fully tighten the nuts until the vehicle has been lowered.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
206 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES  
6. Using the wheel wrench, finish tightening the nuts  
using a crisscross pattern. Correct nut tightness is 90110  
ft. lbs. (125150 N·m). If in doubt about the correct  
tightness, have them checked with a torque wrench by  
your dealer or at a service station.  
9. Adjust the tire pressure when possible.  
NOTE: Do not oil wheel studs. For chrome wheels, do  
not substitute with chrome plated wheel nuts.  
Wheel Nuts  
All wheel nuts should be tightened occasionally to elimi-  
nate the possibility of wheel studs being sheared or the  
bolt holes in the wheels becoming elongated. This is  
especially important during the first few hundred miles  
of operation to allow the wheel nuts to become properly  
set. All nuts should first be firmly seated against the  
wheel. The nuts should then be tightened to recom-  
mended torque. Tighten the nuts to final torque in  
increments. Progress around the bolt circle, tightening  
the nut opposite to the nut just previously tightened until  
final torque is achieved. Recommended torques are  
shown in the following chart.  
WARNING!  
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or  
hard stop could injure someone in the vehicle.  
Always stow the jack parts and the extra tire and  
wheel in the places provided.  
7. Remove wheel blocks. Do not install chrome or alu-  
minum wheel center caps on the spare wheel. This may  
result in cap damage.  
8. Lower the jack to its fully closed position. Stow the  
replaced tire, jack, and tools as previously described.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 207  
HOISTING  
Disc  
Type Nut Stud Size Torque  
Ft. Lbs.  
Torque  
Newton  
Meters  
A conventional floor jack may be used at the jacking  
locations, refer to the graphics that show jacking loca-  
tions. However, a floor jack or frame hoist must never be  
used on any other parts or the underbody.  
Wheels  
Cone  
1/2-20  
90-110  
125-150  
To Stow The Flat Or Spare  
Turn the wheel so that the valve stem is down. Slide the  
wheel retainer through the center of the wheel and  
position it properly across the wheel opening.  
CAUTION!  
Never use a floor jack directly under the differential  
housing of a loaded truck or damage to your vehicle  
may result.  
For convenience in checking the spare tire inflation, stow  
with the valve stem toward the rear of the vehicle.  
6
Attach the wheel wrench to the extension tube. Rotate the  
winch mechanism until the wheel is drawn into place  
against the underside of the vehicle. Continue to rotate  
until you feel the winch mechanism slip or click 3 or 4  
times. It cannot be overtightened. Push against the tire  
several times to be sure it is firmly in place.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
208 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES  
JUMP-STARTING  
WARNING!  
You should not try to start your vehicle by pushing or  
towing. Pushing or towing a vehicle equipped with a  
manual transmission may overheat and damage the  
catalytic converter. Also, there is a greater risk of an  
accident when a vehicle is being pushed or towed. If the  
vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables may be  
used to obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery  
in another vehicle. This type of start can be dangerous if  
done improperly, so follow this procedure carefully.  
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution; do not  
allow battery fluid to contact eyes, skin or clothing.  
Dont lean over battery when attaching clamps or  
allow the clamps to touch each other. If acid splashes  
in eyes or on skin, flush contaminated area immedi-  
ately with large quantities of water.  
A battery generates hydrogen gas which is flam-  
mable and explosive. Keep flame or spark away  
from the vent holes.  
Do not use a booster battery or any other booster  
source that has a greater than 12 volt system, i.e. Do  
not use a 24 volt power source.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 209  
Check the Battery Test Indicator (If Equipped). If a yellow  
or bright colored dot is visible in the indicator (if  
equipped), DO NOT jump-start the battery.  
2. Park the booster vehicle within cable reach but with-  
out letting the vehicles touch. Set the parking brake on  
both vehicles, place transmission in Neutral, and turn the  
ignition OFF.  
3. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electri-  
cal loads.  
4. Connect one end of a jumper cable to the positive  
terminal of the booster battery. Connect the other end of  
the same cable to the positive terminal of the discharged  
battery.  
6
WARNING!  
If the indicator (if equipped) is dark or shows a green dot,  
proceed as follows:  
Do not permit vehicles to touch each other as this  
could establish a ground connection and personal  
injury could result.  
1. Remove all metal jewelry such as watch bands or  
bracelets which might make an unintended electrical  
contact.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
210 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES  
WARNING!  
Do not connect the cable to the negative post of  
the discharge battery. The resulting electrical  
spark could cause the battery to explode.  
During cold weather when temperatures are be-  
low freezing point, electrolyte in a discharged  
battery may freeze. Do not attempt jump starting  
because the battery could rupture or explode. The  
battery temperature must be brought up above  
freezing point before attempting jump start.  
6. Start the engine in the vehicle which has the booster  
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, then start the  
engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.  
5. Connect the other cable, first to the negative terminal  
of the booster battery and then to the engine of the  
vehicle with the discharged battery. Make sure you have  
a good contact on the engine.  
7. When removing the jumper cables, reverse the above  
sequence exactly. Be careful of the moving belts and fan.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 211  
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE  
WARNING!  
If vehicle becomes stuck in snow, sand, or mud, it can  
often be moved by a rocking motion. Move the gear  
selector rhythmically between FIRST and REVERSE,  
while applying slight pressure to the accelerator.  
Any procedure other than above could result in:  
1. Personal injury caused by electrolyte squirting  
out the battery vent;  
In general, the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure  
to maintain the rocking motion without spinning the  
wheels or racing the engine is most effective. Racing the  
engine or spinning the wheels, due to the frustration of  
not freeing the vehicle, may lead to transmission over-  
heating and failure. Allow the engine to idle with the  
transmission selector in NEUTRAL for at least one  
minute after every five rocking-motion cycles. This will  
minimize overheating and reduce the risk of transmis-  
sion failure during prolonged efforts to free a stuck  
vehicle.  
2. Personal injury or property damage due to battery  
explosion;  
3. Damage to charging system of booster vehicle or  
of immobilized vehicle.  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
212 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES  
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE  
Provided that the transmission is operable, tow with the  
transmission in Neutral and the ignition key in the OFF  
position along with the front wheels raised and the rear  
wheels on the ground. Speed must not exceed 30 mph (50  
km/h) and distance must not exceed 15 miles (25 km).  
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent  
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other  
equipment designed for the purpose, following equip-  
ment manufacturers instructions. Use of safety chains is  
mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to  
the main structural members of the vehiclenot to  
bumpers or associated brackets. State and local laws  
applying to vehicles under tow must be observed.  
If the vehicle is to be towed more than 15 miles (25 km)  
the vehicle must be towed with the rear wheels raised  
and the front wheels on the ground. It may also be towed  
on a flatbed or with the front wheels raised and the rear  
wheels on a dolly.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE  
CONTENTS  
Engine Compartment8.3L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216  
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) . . . . . . . . . 217  
Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225  
Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225  
Engine Fuel Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225  
Catalytic Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226  
Crankcase Emission Control System . . . . . . . . 227  
Maintenance Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228  
Air Conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229  
Power Steering Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . 230  
Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217  
Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219  
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220  
Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220  
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220  
Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
214 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE  
Front Suspension Ball Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231  
Steering Linkage Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . 231  
Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232  
Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232  
Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232  
Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233  
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234  
Hoses And Vacuum/Vapor Harnesses . . . . . . . 238  
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238  
Clutch Hydraulic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240  
Clutch Linkage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240  
Propeller Shaft Universal Joints . . . . . . . . . . . 240  
Rear Axle Fluid Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240  
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241  
Front Wheel Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242  
Selection Of Lubricating Grease . . . . . . . . . . . 242  
Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243  
Fuse And Relay Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247  
Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248  
Replacement Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248  
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249  
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249  
Tail, Stop, Turn And Backup Lights . . . . . . . . . 253  
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 215  
Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257  
Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258  
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259  
Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260  
Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
216 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE  
ENGINE COMPARTMENT8.3L  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 217  
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM (OBD II)  
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard  
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors  
the performance of the emissions and engine control  
systems. When these systems are operating properly,  
your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel  
economy, as well as engine emissions well within current  
government regulations.  
CAUTION!  
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator  
Lighton could cause further damage to the emis-  
sion control system. It could also affect fuel economy  
and driveability. The vehicle must be serviced before  
any emissions tests can be performed.  
If the Malfunction Indicator Lightis flashing,  
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss  
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.  
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system  
will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light.It will  
also store diagnostic codes and other information to  
assist your service technician in making repairs. Al-  
though your vehicle will usually be driveable and not  
need towing, see your dealer for service as soon as  
possible.  
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE  
PROGRAMS  
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass  
an inspection of your vehicles emissions control system.  
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
218 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE  
For states which have an I/M (Inspection and  
Maintenance) requirement, this check verifies the  
following: the MIL (Malfunction Indicator Lamp)  
is functioning and is not on when the engine is running,  
and that the OBD (On Board Diagnostic) system is ready  
for testing.  
2. Turn the ignition to the ON position, but do not crank  
or start the engine.  
3. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start  
this test over.  
4. As soon as you turn your key to the ON position, you  
will see your MIL symbol come on as part of a normal  
bulb check.  
Normally, the OBD system will be ready. The OBD  
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently  
serviced, if you recently had a dead battery, or a battery  
replacement. If the OBD system should be determined  
not ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.  
5. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will  
happen:  
a. The MIL light will blink for approximately 5 sec-  
onds and then remain on until the first engine crank or  
the key is turned off. This means that your vehicles  
OBD system is not ready and you should not proceed  
to the I/M station.  
Your vehicle has a simple ignition key actuated test  
which you can use prior to going to the test station. To  
check if your vehicles OBD system is ready, you must do  
the following:  
1. Insert your ignition key into the ignition switch.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 219  
b. The MIL light will remain fully illuminated until the  
first engine crank or the key is turned off. This means  
that your vehicles OBD system is ready and you can  
proceed to the I/M station.  
DEALER SERVICE  
Your dealer has the qualified service personnel, special  
tools and equipment to perform all service operations in  
an expert manner. Service manuals are available which  
include detailed service information for your vehicle.  
Refer to these manuals before attempting any procedure  
yourself.  
If your OBD system is not ready, you should see your  
dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was recently  
serviced or had a battery failure or replacement, you may  
need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you  
normally would in order for your OBD system to update.  
A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate  
that the system is now ready.  
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control  
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed  
against you.  
Regardless of whether your vehicles OBD system is  
ready or not ready, if the MIL symbol is illuminated  
during normal vehicle operation, you should have your  
vehicle serviced before going to the I/M station. The I/M  
station can fail your vehicle because the MIL symbol is on  
with the engine running.  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
220 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE  
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES  
WARNING!  
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance  
services determined by the engineers who designed your  
vehicle.  
You can be badly injured working on or around a  
motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which  
you have the knowledge and the proper equipment.  
If you have any doubt about your ability to perform  
a service job, take your vehicle to a competent  
mechanic.  
Besides the maintenance items for which there are fixed  
maintenance intervals, there are other items that should  
operate satisfactorily without periodic maintenance.  
However, if a malfunction of these items does occur, it  
could adversely affect the engine or vehicle performance.  
These items should be inspected if a malfunction is  
observed or suspected.  
REPLACEMENT PARTS  
Use of genuine Moparparts for normal/scheduled  
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to in-  
sure the designed performance. Damage or failures  
caused by the use of non-Mopar parts for maintenance  
and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturers  
warranty.  
Engine Oil  
Checking Oil Level  
To assure proper lubrication of your vehicles engine, the  
engine oil must be maintained at the correct level. The  
best time to check the engine oil level is about 5 minutes  
after a fully warmed up engine is shut off or before  
starting the engine after it has sat overnight.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 221  
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will  
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain  
the oil level between the ADD and SAFE markings on the  
dipstick. Adding one quart of oil when the reading is at  
the ADD mark will result in a SAFE reading on these  
engines.  
Change Engine Oil  
CAUTION!  
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause  
oil aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could dam-  
age your engine.  
Road conditions as well as your kind of driving affect the  
interval at which your oil should be changed. Check the  
following to determine if any apply to you:  
Day or night temperatures are below 32°F (0°C).  
Stop and go driving.  
7
Extensive engine idling.  
Driving in dusty conditions  
Short trips of less than 10 miles (16.2 km)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
222 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE  
More than 50% of your driving is at sustained high  
speeds during hot weather, above 32°C (90°F)  
conditions, special attention should be given to the  
engine air cleaner, the crankcase inlet air cleaner and, the  
crankcase ventilation system. Make sure that these units  
are clean at all times. This will tend to reduce to a  
minimum the amount of abrasive material that may enter  
the engine.  
Taxi, Police or delivery service (commercial service)  
Off-road or desert operation  
If equipped for and operating with E-85 (ethanol)  
fuel.  
Engine Oil Selection  
For best performance and maximum protection under all  
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only  
recommends engine oils that are API certified and meet  
the requirements of DaimlerChrysler Material Standard  
MS-10725. Use Mopar or an equivalent oil meeting the  
specification MS-10725.  
NOTE: If ANY of these apply to you then change your  
engine oil every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or 3 months,  
whichever comes first and follow schedule Bof the  
Maintenance Schedulessection of this manual.  
If none of these apply to you, then change your engine oil  
at every interval shown on schedule Aof the Mainte-  
nance Schedulessection of this manual.  
The manufacturer recommends the use of a full syn-  
thetic engine oil, such as Mobil 1SAE 10W-30.  
Dusty Conditions  
Driving through dust-laden air increases the problems of  
keeping abrasive materials out of the engine. Under these  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 223  
Engine Oil Identification (API) Symbol  
There is a symbol to aid you in selecting the proper  
engine oil.  
This symbol means that the oil has  
been certified by the American  
Petroleum Institute (API). We  
only recommend synthetic API  
Certified engine oils, such as Mo-  
bil 1, that meet the requirements  
of Material Standard MS-10725.  
Use Mopar or an equivalent oil  
meeting the specification MS-  
10725.  
Synthetic Engine Oils  
7
There are a number of engine oils being promoted as  
either synthetic or semi-synthetic. If you chose to use  
such a product, use only those oils that meet the Ameri-  
can Petroleum Institute (API) and SAE viscosity stan-  
dard. Follow the service schedule that describes your  
driving type.  
Engine Oil Viscosity Chart  
The proper SAE viscosity grade of engine oil should be  
selected based on the following recommendation and be  
within the operating temperature shown in the engine oil  
viscosity chart.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
224 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE  
Materials Added to Engine Oil  
of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high  
quality filters should be used to assure most efficient  
service. Mopar Engine Oil Filters are a high quality oil  
filter and are recommended.  
Do not add any materials (other than leak detection dyes)  
to engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its  
performance may be impaired by supplemental addi-  
tives.  
Drive Belts Check Condition and Tension  
Disposing of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters  
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and  
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,  
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the  
environment. Contact your dealer, service station, or  
governmental agency for advice on how and where used  
oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area.  
At the mileage indicated in the maintenance schedule, all  
belts should be checked for condition and proper tension.  
Improper belt tension can cause belt slippage and failure.  
Belts should be inspected for evidence of cuts, cracks, or  
glazing, and replaced if there is indication of damage  
which could result in belt failure. If adjustment is re-  
quired, see your authorized dealer for service. Low  
generator belt tension can cause battery failure. A special  
tool is required to properly measure tension and to  
restore belt tension to factory specifications.  
Engine Oil Filter  
The engine oil filter should be replaced at every engine  
oil change.  
Engine Oil Filter Selection  
The manufacturers engines have a full-flow type oil  
filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality  
Also check belt routing to make sure there is no interfer-  
ence between the belts and other engine components.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 225  
Spark Plugs  
WARNING!  
Spark plugs must fire properly to assure engine perfor-  
mance and emission control. New plugs should be in-  
stalled at the specified mileage. The entire set should be  
replaced if there is any malfunction due to a faulty spark  
plug, malfunctioning spark plugs can damage the cata-  
lytic converter. For proper type of replacement spark  
plugs, refer to the Vehicle Emission Control Informa-  
tionlabel in the engine compartment.  
The air cleaner can provide a measure of protection  
in the case of engine backfire. Do not remove the air  
cleaner unless such removal is necessary for repair or  
maintenance. Make sure that no one is near the  
engine compartment before starting the vehicle with  
the air cleaner removed. Failure to do so can result in  
serious personal injury.  
Engine Air Cleaner Filter  
Under normal driving conditions, replace the air filter at  
the intervals shown on Schedule A. If, however, you  
drive the vehicle frequently under dusty or severe con-  
ditions, the filter element should be inspected periodi-  
cally and replaced if necessary at the intervals shown on  
Schedule B.  
Engine Fuel Filter  
A plugged fuel filter can cause stalling, limit the speed at  
which a vehicle can be driven or cause hard starting.  
Should an excessive amount of dirt accumulate in the  
fuel tank, frequent filter replacement may be necessary.  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
226 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE  
Catalytic Converter  
CAUTION!  
The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel  
only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the  
catalyst as an emission control device.  
Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your  
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In  
the event of engine malfunction, particularly involv-  
ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor-  
mance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Contin-  
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con-  
verter will not require maintenance. However, it is im-  
portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure  
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst  
damage.  
ued operation of your vehicle with  
a
severe  
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,  
resulting in possible damage to the converter and the  
vehicle.  
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control  
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed  
against you.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 227  
To minimize the possibility of catalyst damage:  
WARNING!  
Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition  
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in  
motion.  
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over  
materials that can burn. Such materials might be  
grass or leaves coming into contact with your ex-  
haust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in  
areas where your exhaust system can contact any-  
thing that can burn.  
Do not try to start engine by pushing or towing the  
vehicle.  
Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires  
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic  
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough  
idling or malfunctioning operating conditions.  
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning  
engine operation, a scorching odor may indicate severe  
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, the  
vehicle should be stopped, the engine shut off and the  
vehicle allowed to cool. Thereafter, service, including a  
tune-up to manufacturers specifications, should be ob-  
tained immediately.  
Crankcase Emission Control System  
7
Proper operation of this system depends on freedom  
from plugging due to deposits. As vehicle mileage builds  
up, the Crankcase Ventilation Valve orifice may accumu-  
late deposits. If a valve is not working properly, replace it  
with a new orifice. DO NOT ATTEMPT TO CLEAN THE  
OLD ORIFICE!  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
228 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE  
Check the ventilation hose for indication of damage or  
plugging deposits. Replace if necessary.  
Maintenance Free Battery  
The top of the maintenance free battery is permanently  
sealed. You will never have to add water, nor is periodic  
maintenance required.  
To determine the battery charge, check the battery test  
indicator (if equipped) on top of the battery. If the test  
indicator (if equipped) appears light or yellow, replace  
the battery.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 229  
WARNING!  
CAUTION!  
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can  
burn or even blind you. Dont allow battery fluid to  
contact your eyes, skin or clothing. Dont lean over a  
battery when attaching clamps. If acid splashes in  
eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with  
large amounts of water.  
It is essential when replacing the cables on the  
battery that the positive cable is attached to the  
positive post and the negative cable is attached to the  
negative post. Battery posts are marked (+) positive  
and negative (-) and identified on the battery case.  
Also, if a fast chargeris used while battery is in  
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables be-  
fore connecting the charger to battery. Do not use a  
fast chargerto provide starting voltage.  
Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep flame  
or sparks away from the battery. Dont use a booster  
battery or any other booster source with an output  
greater than 12 volts. Dont allow cable clamps to  
touch each other.  
7
Air Conditioner  
Battery posts, terminals and related accessories con-  
tain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after  
handling.  
For best possible performance, your air conditioner  
should be checked and serviced by an Authorized Dealer  
at the start of each warm season. This service should  
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a system  
performance check. Drive belt tension should also be  
checked at this time.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
230 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE  
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling  
WARNING!  
The air conditioning system of your vehicle contains  
R-134a, a refrigerant that does not deplete the ozone layer  
in the upper atmosphere. The manufacturer recommends  
that air conditioning service be done by facilities using  
refrigerant recycling and recovery equipment that meets  
SAE standard J1991.  
Use only refrigerants approved by the manufac-  
turer for your air conditioning system. Some un-  
approved refrigerants are flammable and can ex-  
plode, injuring you. Other unapproved  
refrigerants can cause the system to fail, requiring  
costly repairs.  
Power Steering Fluid Check  
Never add air conditioning refrigerant to correct a  
non-cooling problem unless pressure gauges are  
connected to the system by a certified technician.  
Lack of cooling could be due to a restriction and  
adding refrigerant may cause a dangerous pres-  
sure rise and you could be injured.  
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined  
service interval is not required. The fluid should only be  
checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are  
apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as antici-  
pated. Coordinate inspection efforts through a certified  
DaimlerChrysler Dealership.ꢂ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 231  
service. However, if the seals on the ball joints are  
damaged, the joints should be replaced. Serviceable  
replacement ball joints are available.  
WARNING!  
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and  
with the engine off to prevent injury from moving  
parts and to insure accurate fluid level reading. Do  
not overfill. Use only manufacturers recommended  
power steering fluid.  
Front suspension ball joints should be replaced only by a  
qualified service technician using tools specially de-  
signed for this purpose. Damage to the joints and/or  
suspension components may result if improper replace-  
ment procedures are used.  
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated  
level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all  
surfaces. Refer to Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and  
Genuine Parts for correct fluid type.  
If seals are damaged the ball joints should be replaced to  
prevent leakage or contamination of the grease.  
Steering Linkage Inspection  
Whenever the vehicle is hoisted, all steering linkage  
joints should be inspected for evidence of damage. If  
seals are damaged, parts should be replaced to prevent  
leakage or contamination of the grease. Lubricate the  
steering linkage regularly according to the Maintenance  
Schedulein this manual.  
7
Front Suspension Ball Joints  
The ball joints and seals should be inspected whenever  
the vehicle is serviced for other reasons.  
The ball joints originally supplied with the vehicle are  
permanently lubricated at the factory and do not require  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
232 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE  
Body Lubrication  
Windshield Wiper Blades  
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as  
seat tracks, doors, tailgate and hood hinges, should be  
lubricated periodically to assure quiet, easy operation  
and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the appli-  
cation of any lubricant, the parts concerned should be  
wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating  
excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular  
attention should also be given to hood latching compo-  
nents to insure proper function. When performing other  
underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism  
and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.  
The rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield  
should be cleaned periodically with a sponge or soft cloth  
and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accu-  
mulations of salt or road film.  
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods  
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use  
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt  
from a dry windshield.  
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from  
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with  
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.  
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a  
year, preferably in the fall and spring. Apply a small  
amount of a high quality lubricant such as MoparLock  
Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.  
Windshield Washers  
The fluid reservoir is located under the hood and should  
be checked for fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the  
reservoir with windshield washer solvent only (not ra-  
diator antifreeze).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 233  
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system  
in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or  
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This  
rating information can be found on most washer fluid  
containers.  
directed on the container, aids cleaning action, reduces  
the freezing point to avoid line clogging, and is not  
harmful to paint or trim.  
Exhaust System  
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into  
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust  
system.  
WARNING!  
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust  
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the  
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is  
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the com-  
plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,  
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open  
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes  
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,  
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised  
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.  
Commercially available windshield washer solvents  
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care  
must be exercised when filling or working around  
the washer solution.  
7
After the engine has warmed, operate the defroster for a  
few minutes to reduce the possibility of smearing or  
freezing the fluid on the cold windshield. Mopar All  
Weather Windshield Washer Solution, used with water as  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
234 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE  
Cooling System  
WARNING!  
Cooling System Maintenance  
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon  
monoxide (CO) which is colorless and odorless.  
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can  
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, fol-  
low the preceding safety tips.  
At the intervals shown in the Maintenance Schedules  
Section of the manual, the system should be drained,  
flushed and filled.  
Inspection  
Coolant protection checks should be made every 12  
months (prior to the onset of freezing weather, where  
applicable). If coolant is dirty or rusty in appearance, the  
system should be drained, flushed and refilled with fresh  
coolant as specified.  
Exhaust System Rubber Isolator and Loop-Type  
Hanger If Equipped  
Inspect surfaces whenever the vehicle is hoisted for  
rubber to metal separation or deep cracks. SLIGHT  
CRACKING DUE TO WEATHERING DOES NOT AD-  
VERSELY AFFECT PERFORMANCE. If, however, exces-  
sively deep localized cracks are present, or any part of the  
exhaust system abnormally contacts the underbody hard-  
ware, the isolator and/or hanger should be replaced.  
Inspect the entire cooling system for leaks. Check the face  
of the radiator for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, or  
other foreign matter. If dirty, clean the radiator core with  
a garden hose. With the engine OFF, gently spray water  
from the back of the radiator core.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 235  
Check the coolant reserve tank tube for condition and  
tightness or connections at the reserve tank and radiator.  
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is  
no longer a need to remove the coolant pressure cap  
except for checking coolant freeze point or replacement  
with new antifreeze coolant.  
Check the coolant pressure cap and coolant reserve  
system for proper vacuum sealing. With the engine at  
normal operating temperature, note the level of the  
coolant in the coolant reserve tank. Without removing the  
pressure cap (with the engine off), drain a small amount  
of coolant from the radiator draincock. If the coolant level  
in the reserve tank drops, the system is sealing properly.  
WARNING!  
Never add coolant to the radiator when the engine is  
overheated. Do not loosen or remove pressure cap to  
cool an overheated engine! The coolant is under  
pressure and severe scalding could result.  
Coolant Level  
The coolant reserve system provides a quick visual  
method of determining that the coolant level is adequate.  
With the engine idling, and warmed to the normal  
operating temperature, the level of the coolant on the  
overflow bottle should be between the fluid level marks.  
Check the coolant level whenever the hood is raised.  
Drain, Flush And Refill  
7
At intervals shown on the Maintenance Schedules, the  
system should be drained, flushed and refilled. Refer to  
your dealer or consult a service manual for proper  
procedures.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
236 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE  
Adding Coolant  
NOTE: Failure to follow the antifreeze concentration  
and replacement recommendations, or failure to use  
antifreeze formulated to prevent corrosion of all cooling  
system metals, may result in radiator plugging, overheat-  
ing, or cooling system leaks such as in core hole plugs.  
When adding coolant or refilling system, a 50% solution  
of ethylene glycol antifreeze coolant in water should be  
used. Higher concentrations (not to exceed 65%) are  
required if temperatures below -34 F° (-37 C°) are antici-  
pated. Use only high purity water such as distilled or  
deionized water when mixing the water/antifreeze solu-  
tion. The use of lower quality water will reduce the  
amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling  
system. Please note that it is the owners responsibility to  
maintain the proper level of protection against freezing  
according to the temperatures occurring in the area  
where the vehicle is operated.  
WARNING!  
Never add coolant to the radiator when the engine is  
overheated. Do not loosen or remove pressure cap to  
cool an overheated engine. The coolant is under  
pressure and severe scalding could result.  
NOTE: Mixing coolant types will decrease the life of the  
engine coolant and will require more frequent coolant  
changes.  
Recommended Engine Coolant  
Refer to Recommended Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine  
Parts for correct fluid type.  
When additional coolant is needed to maintain the  
proper level, add the recommended concentration of  
antifreeze and water to the overflow bottle. Do not  
overfill.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 237  
Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant  
CAUTION!  
Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant is a regulated  
substance requiring proper disposal. Check with your  
local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your  
community. Do not store ethylene glycol-based engine  
coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in  
puddles on the ground. Prevent ingestion by animals and  
children. If ingested by a child, contact a physician  
immediately. Clean up any ground spills immediately.  
Mixing of coolants other than specified (non-  
HOAT), may result in engine damage that may not  
be covered under the new vehicle warranty, and  
decreased corrosion protection. If a non-HOAT cool-  
ant is introduced into the cooling system in an  
emergency, it should be replaced with the specified  
coolant as soon as possible.  
Do not use plain water alone or alcohol base anti-  
freeze products. Do not use additional rust inhibi-  
tors or antirust products, as they may not be compat-  
ible with the radiator coolant and may plug the  
radiator.  
Coolant Pressure Cap  
The coolant pressure cap must be fully tightened to  
prevent the loss of coolant and to insure that the coolant  
will return to the radiator from the coolant reserve tank.  
The pressure cap should be inspected and cleaned if there  
is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing  
surfaces.  
7
This vehicle has not been designed for use with  
Propylene Glycol based coolants. Use of Propylene  
Glycol based coolants is not recommended.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
238 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE  
Insure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted or  
collapsed.  
WARNING!  
The warning words DO NOT OPEN HOTon the  
radiator pressure cap are a safety precaution. Heat  
causes pressure to build up in the cooling system. To  
prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the pres-  
sure cap.  
Inspect all hose connections such as clamps and cou-  
plings to make sure they are secure and no leaks are  
present.  
Components should be replaced immediately if there is  
any evidence of wear or damage that could cause failure.  
Hoses And Vacuum/Vapor Harnesses  
Brake System  
Inspect surfaces of hoses and nylon tubing for evidence  
of heat and mechanical damage. Hard or soft spots,  
brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, abrasions, and exces-  
sive swelling indicate deterioration of the rubber.  
Power Disc Brakes (front and rear)  
Disc brakes do not require adjustment; however, several  
hard stops during the break-in period are recommended  
to seat the linings and wear off any foreign material.  
Pay particular attention to those hoses nearest to high  
heat sources such as the exhaust manifold. Inspect hose  
routing to be sure hoses do not come in contact with any  
heat source or moving component which may cause heat  
damage or mechanical wear.  
Brake Master Cylinder  
The fluid level of the master cylinder should be checked  
when performing under the hood service, or immedi-  
ately if the brake system warning lamp indicates system  
failure.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 239  
The brake master cylinder has a translucent plastic  
reservoir. On the outboard side of the reservoir, there is a  
MAXdot and an MINdot. The fluid level must be  
kept within these two dots. Do not add fluid above the  
MAX mark, because leakage may occur at the cap.  
WARNING!  
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in  
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the  
brake fluid catching fire.  
With disc brakes the fluid level can be expected to fall as  
the brake linings wear. However, an unexpected drop in  
fluid level may be caused by a leak and a system check  
should be conducted.  
Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed  
container to avoid contamination from foreign matter or  
moisture.  
Refer to Recommended Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine  
Parts for the correct Fluid type.  
CAUTION!  
7
Do not allow a petroleum-base fluid to contaminate  
the brake fluid. Seal damage may result.  
WARNING!  
Use of a brake fluid that may have a lower initial  
boiling point, or is unidentified as to specification,  
may result in sudden brake failure during hard  
prolonged braking. You could have an accident.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
240 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE  
Brake Hoses  
Propeller Shaft Universal Joints  
Inspection should be performed whenever the brake  
system is serviced or at intervals specified. Inspect hy-  
draulic brake hoses for surface cracking, scuffing or worn  
spots. If there is any evidence of cracking, scuffing, or  
worn spots, the hose should be replaced immediately!  
Eventual deterioration of the hose can take place with  
possible burst failure.  
Cross Type (No fittings) Relubrication of this type of  
universal joint is not required. The seals should be  
inspected for external leaks or damage. If external leaks  
or damage is evident, the universal joint should be  
replaced.  
Rear Axle Fluid Level  
Refer to Recommended Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine  
Parts for the correct Fluid type. For normal service,  
periodic fluid level checks are not required. When the  
vehicle is serviced for other reasons the exterior surfaces  
of the axle assembly should be inspected. If gear oil  
leakage is suspected inspect the fluid level.  
Clutch Hydraulic System  
The clutch hydraulic system is a sealed maintenance-free  
system. In the event of leakage or other malfunction, the  
system must be replaced.  
Clutch Linkage  
This inspection should be made with the vehicle in a level  
position. The fluid level should be 3/41/4below the  
plug on DANA M60 HD/248 mm rear axles.  
If the clutch pedal linkage begins to squeak or grunt, the  
clutch pedal pivot bushings should be lubricated. Refer  
to Recommended Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts  
for the correct lubricant type.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 241  
Drain and Refill  
Transmission  
Vehicles operated in normal service do not have regularly  
scheduled oil changes. If fluid has become contaminated  
with water or to provide the correct viscosity grade, drain  
and refill.  
Lubricant Selection  
Refer to the Recommended Fluids, Lubricants and Genu-  
ine Parts section for correct fluid type.  
Lubricant Selection  
Refer to Recommended Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine  
Parts for correct fluid type.  
CAUTION!  
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac-  
turers recommended fluid may cause deterioration  
in transmission shift quality. Refer to the Recom-  
mended Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts sec-  
tion for correct fluid type.  
NOTE: The presence of water in the gear lubricant will  
result in corrosion and possible failure of differential  
components. Operation of the vehicle in water, as may be  
encountered in some off-highway types of service, will  
require draining and refilling the axle to avoid damage.  
7
Fluid Level Check  
The fluid in the transmission should be checked when-  
ever other underhood services are done. Check the fluid  
level by removing the fill plug located on the left side of  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
242 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE  
the transmission. The fluid level should be at the bottom  
of the fill hole. Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the  
proper level.  
Selection of Lubricating Grease  
The National Lubricating Grease Institute (NLGI) has  
developed a symbol (Certification Mark) to aid the  
vehicle owner in the proper selection of grease for the  
lubrication of wheel bearings and chassis components.  
This symbol (an example is shown below) is located on  
the grease container and identifies the application and  
quality of the grease.  
Frequency of Fluid Change  
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at  
the factory will give satisfactory lubrication for the life of  
the vehicle. If the vehicle is operated under severe  
conditions, change the fluid as specified in Maintenance  
Schedule B. If contaminated with water, the fluid should  
be changed immediately.  
There are two groups  
identified, those for wheel  
bearings (Letter G) and  
those for chassis (Letter  
L) lubrication. Perfor-  
mance categories within  
these groups result in dual  
letter designations for  
each group. The letter des-  
ignations shown in the ex-  
ample are the highest  
Front Wheel Bearings  
Front wheel bearings for all Dodge Ram Trucks are  
sealed-for-life. They do not require greasing or seal  
replacement. In some instances, these bearings will  
purgeexcess grease and the bearing will look slightly  
wet. This is normal. Periodic inspection for excess play is  
recommended.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 243  
quality level available and when combined as shown can  
be used for both wheel bearing and chassis lubrication.  
Use only those greases that have the NLGI symbol on the  
container along with the proper quality level for your  
application.  
The following maintenance recommendations will enable  
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion  
resistance built into your vehicle.  
What Causes Corrosion?  
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of  
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.  
Appearance Care and Protection from Corrosion  
Protection of Body and Paint from Corrosion  
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-  
graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads  
passable in snow and ice, and those that are sprayed on  
trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are highly  
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,  
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,  
road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme  
hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will  
have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and under-  
body protection.  
The most common causes are:  
Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.  
Stone and gravel impact.  
Insects, tree sap and tar.  
7
Salt in the air near seacoast localities.  
Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
244 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE  
Washing  
CAUTION!  
Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your ve-  
hicle in the shade using a mild car wash soap, and  
rinse the panels completely with clear water.  
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials  
such as steel wool or scouring powder, which will  
scratch metal and painted surfaces.  
If insects, tar or other similar deposits have accumu-  
lated on your vehicle, wash it as soon as possible.  
Special Care  
Use Moparauto polish to remove road film and  
stains and to polish your vehicle. Take care never to  
scratch the paint.  
If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive  
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once  
a month.  
Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing  
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint  
finish.  
It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges  
of the doors, rocker panels and tailgate be kept clear  
and open.  
If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,  
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is  
considered the responsibility of the owner.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 245  
If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or  
similar cause which destroys the paint and protective  
coating have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible.  
The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibil-  
ity of the owner.  
If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider  
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.  
Use Mopartouch up paint on scratches as soon as  
possible. Your dealer has touch up paint to match the  
color of your vehicle.  
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and  
chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly  
with mild soap and water to prevent corrosion. To  
remove heavy soil, select a nonabrasive, non-acidic  
cleaner. Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle  
brush or metal polishes. Only Mopar cleaners are  
recommended. Do not use oven cleaner. Avoid auto-  
matic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh  
brushes that may damage the wheelsprotective fin-  
ish.  
Interior Care  
Use MoparFabric Cleaner to clean fabric upholstery  
and carpeting.  
Use MoparVinyl Cleaner to clean vinyl upholstery and  
trim.  
MoparTotal Clean is specifically recommended for  
leather upholstery.  
7
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular  
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt  
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery  
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.  
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth  
If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,  
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well  
packaged and sealed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
246 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE  
and MoparTotal Clean. Care should be taken to avoid  
soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please  
do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, deter-  
gents, or ammonia based cleaners to clean your leather  
upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not  
required to maintain the original condition.  
defrosters or windshields equipped with a windshield  
wiper de-icer. Do not use scrapers or other sharp instru-  
ments which may scratch the elements.  
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the  
towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner  
directly on the mirror.  
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses  
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are  
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care  
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.  
WARNING!  
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.  
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in  
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.  
1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be  
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive  
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp  
rag.  
Glass Surfaces  
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis  
with any commercial household-type glass cleaner.  
Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use caution when  
cleaning inside rear windows equipped with electric  
2. Dry with a soft tissue.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 247  
Seat Belt Maintenance  
FUSE AND RELAY CENTER  
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical  
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.  
Sun damage will also weaken the fabric.  
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or  
lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the car to  
wash them.  
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the  
buckles do not work properly.  
7
Your vehicle is equipped with a fuse and relay center  
located in the engine compartment near the battery.  
Located on the underside of the cover is a label that  
identifies each component.  
1. Disconnect the battery negative (-) cable before remov-  
ing the cover.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
248 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE  
2. Use specified fuses only.  
REPLACEMENT LIGHT BULBS  
LIGHT BULBS Inside  
Overhead Console Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TS 212-2  
Bulb No.  
3. Always properly reinstall the cover.  
Dome Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7679  
VEHICLE STORAGE  
If you are storing your vehicle for more than 21 days, we  
recommend that you take the following steps to mini-  
mize the drain on your vehicles battery:  
All of the inside bulbs are brass or glass wedge base.  
Aluminum base bulbs are not approved.  
Disconnect the Ignition-Off Draw fuse (I.O.D.) fuse  
located in the Fuse and Relay Center, located in the  
engine compartment. The I.O.D. cavity includes a  
snap-in retainer that allows the fuse to be discon-  
nected, without removing it from the fuse block.  
LIGHT BULBS Outside  
Bulb No.  
Back-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3057  
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 912  
Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9006LL  
Headlamp (Halogen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9007QL  
Park & Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4157NAK  
Rear License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168  
Rear Cargo Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 912  
Tail & Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3057  
Cab Clearance Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168  
Dual Rear Wheel Sidemarker Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 168  
Dual Rear Wheel Tailgate ID Lights (3) . . . . . . . . . 168  
As an alternative to the above steps you may, discon-  
nect the negative cables from both batteries.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 249  
BULB REPLACEMENT  
Headlight (Halogen)/Front Park and Turn Lights  
CAUTION!  
This is a halogen bulb. Avoid touching the glass  
with your fingers. Reduced bulb life will result.  
1. Remove the two (2) expanding fasteners from the  
headlight welt.  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
250 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE  
2. Remove the three (3) bolts from the headlight housing.  
NOTE: The lower bolt on the driver side headlight also  
retains the ambient temperature sensor between the  
headlight assembly and the frame.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 251  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
252 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE  
3. Pull the housing out from the fender to allow room to  
disconnect the electrical connectors.  
5. Twist connector on turn signal/park light bulb 14 turn  
and remove connector and bulb from housing.  
6. Remove housing from vehicle with headlight halogen  
bulb in housing.  
1
7. Twist collar on headlight halogen bulb 4 turn and  
remove headlight bulb from the housing.  
8. Replace headlight or turn signal bulb. Do not touch  
the headlight halogen bulb.  
9. Reverse procedure for installation of bulbs and hous-  
ing.  
10. Tighten the outboard fastener first.  
4. Unlock and pull connector straight from the base of  
the headlight halogen bulb.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 253  
Tail, Stop, Turn and Backup Lights  
2. Pull the housing straight out from the body, with a  
quick motion, to separate the housing from the body. If  
not pulled straight, locators may be damaged.  
1. Remove the two (2) screws that pass through the bed  
sheetmetal.  
7
3. Push the red lock slide in on the connector and remove  
the housing from the vehicle.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
254 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE  
4. Remove the four (4) screws from the bulb strip in the  
housing.  
5. Pull the appropriate bulb straight from the bulb strip.  
Top Bulb: Park/Turn/Hazard  
Center Bulb: Stop/Park/Sidemarker  
Bottom Bulb: Backup Lights  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 255  
6. Reverse procedure for installation of bulbs and hous-  
ing.  
Center High-Mounted Stoplight With Cargo Light  
1. Remove the two (2) screws holding the housing/lens  
to the body as shown.  
7. While holding the taillight firmly in place, fasten the  
top screw first.  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
256 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE  
2. Separate the connector holding the housing and wir-  
ing harness to the body.  
4. Pull desired bulb straight from the socket.  
Outside Bulbs: Cargo Lamps  
1
3. Turn desired bulb socket 4 turn and remove socket  
and bulb from housing.  
Inside Bulb: Center High Mount Stop Lamp  
5. Reverse procedure for installation of bulbs and hous-  
ing.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 257  
Fog Lights  
2. Pull bulb straight from the connector.  
1. Reach under the vehicle, unlock and twist connector  
counterclockwise 14 turn and remove connector and bulb  
from housing.  
7
3. Reverse procedure for installation of bulbs and hous-  
ing.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
258 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE  
FLUID CAPACITIES  
U.S.  
Metric  
98L  
Fuel  
SRT-10 Models  
26 gal.  
8.5 qts.  
20 qts.  
Engine Oil (with filter)  
Cooling System  
8.3L  
8.3L  
8.0L  
19L  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 259  
RECOMMENDED FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS  
Engine  
Component  
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts  
Engine Coolant  
MoparAntifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/102,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hybrid Or-  
ganic Additive Technology) P/N 05066386AA or equivalent.  
Engine Oil  
We only recommend synthetic engine oils, such as Mobil 1, that are API  
Certified and meet the requirements of Material Standard MS-10725.  
Engine Oil Filter  
Spark Plugs  
MoparEngine Oil Filter, P/N 5281090 or equivalent.  
Refer to the Vehicle Emission Control Information label in the engine com-  
partment.  
Fuel Selection  
91 Octane, (R+M)/2 Method  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
260 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE  
Chassis  
Component  
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts.  
Transmission Fluid  
Mopar Synthetic Manual Transmission Lubricant 75W/85W (Castrol Syn-  
torq LT 75W/85W)  
Clutch Linkage  
Multipurpose Grease, NLGI Grade 2 E.P.  
Limited-Slip Rear Axle  
MoparSAE 90W. Limited-Slip Rear Axles require the addition of 147 ml  
(5 oz.) Moparlimited slip additive.  
Brake Master Cylinder  
MoparDOT 3 and SAE J1703 should be used. If DOT 3 brake fluid is not  
available, then DOT 4 or DOT 4+ is acceptable. Use only recommended  
brake fluids.  
Power Steering Reservoir  
MoparATF+4, Automatic Transmission Fluid  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
M
A
I
N
T
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES  
E
N
A
N
C
E
CONTENTS  
Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . . . 262  
Maintenance Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262  
Schedule B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265  
Schedule A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274  
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
M
A
I
262 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES  
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE  
The Scheduledmaintenance services, listed in bold  
type in this section (Section 8) must be done at the times  
or mileages specified to assure the continued proper  
functioning of the emission control system. These, and all  
other maintenance services included in this manual,  
should be done to provide best vehicle performance and  
reliability. More frequent maintenance may be needed for  
vehicles in severe operating conditions such as dusty  
areas and very short trip driving.  
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES  
There are two maintenance schedules that show the  
required service for your vehicle.  
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
First is Schedule B. It is for vehicles that are operated  
under the conditions that are listed below and at the  
beginning of the schedule.  
Day or night temperatures are below 32° F (0° C).  
Stop and go driving.  
S
C
H
E
Extensive engine idling.  
D
U
L
Inspection and service also should be done any time a  
malfunction is suspected.  
Driving in dusty conditions.  
E
NOTE: Maintenance, replacement, or repair of the emis-  
sion control devices and systems on your vehicle may be  
performed by any automotive repair establishment or  
individual using any automotive part which has been  
certified pursuant to U.S. EPA or, in the State of Califor-  
nia, California Air Resources Board regulations.  
Short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km).  
S
8
More than 50% of your driving is at sustained high  
speeds during hot weather, above 90° F C (32°).  
Heavy Loading.  
Taxi, police, or delivery service (commercial service).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
M
A
I
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 263  
Off-road or desert operation.  
Use the schedule that best describes your driving condi-  
tions. Where time and mileage are listed, follow the  
interval that occurs first.  
N
T
If equipped for and operating with E-85 (ethanol)  
fuel.  
E
N
A
N
C
E
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change in-  
tervals exceed 6000 miles (10 000 km) or 6 months  
whichever comes first.  
NOTE: If ANY of these apply to you then change your  
engine oil every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or 3 months,  
whichever comes first and follow schedule Bof the  
Maintenance Schedulessection of this manual.  
S
C
H
E
CAUTION!  
NOTE: Most vehicles are operated under the conditions  
listed for Schedule B.  
Failure to perform the required maintenance items  
may result in damage to the vehicle.  
D
U
L
Second is Schedule A. It is for vehicles that are not  
operated under any of the conditions listed under Sched-  
ule B.  
E
S
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
M
A
I
264 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES  
At Each Stop for Fuel  
Check all lights and all other electrical items for correct  
operation.  
N
T
Check the engine oil level about 5 minutes after a fully  
warmed engine is shut off. Checking the oil level while  
the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accu-  
racy of the oil level reading. Add oil only when the  
level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark.  
E
At Each Oil Change  
N
A
N
C
E
Change the engine oil filter.  
Inspect the exhaust system.  
Inspect the brake hoses.  
Check the windshield washer solvent and add if  
required.  
S
C
H
E
Inspect the CV joints (if equipped) and front suspen-  
sion components.  
Once a Month  
D
U
L
Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or  
damage.  
Check the automatic transmission fluid level.  
Check the manual transmission fluid level.  
Check the coolant level, hoses, and clamps.  
E
S
Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals  
as required.  
8
Tire Rotation  
Check the fluid levels of coolant reservoir, brake  
master cylinder, and transmission and add as needed.  
Rotate the tires at 6,000 miles (10 000 km).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
M
A
I
SCHEDULE B265  
Schedule B”  
Follow schedule Bif you usually operate your vehicle  
under one or more of the following conditions.  
Taxi, police, or delivery service (commercial service).  
Off-road or desert operation.  
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
If equipped for and operating with E-85 (ethanol)  
fuel.  
Day or night temperatures are below 32° F (0° C).  
Stop and go driving.  
NOTE: If ANY of these apply to you then change your  
engine oil every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or 3 months,  
whichever comes first and follow schedule Bof the  
Maintenance Schedulessection of this manual.  
Extensive engine idling.  
S
C
H
E
Driving in dusty conditions.  
Short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km).  
If none of these apply to you, then change your engine oil  
at every interval shown on schedule Aof the Mainte-  
nance Schedulessection of this manual.  
D
U
L
More than 50% of your driving is at sustained high  
speeds during hot weather, above 90° F C (32°).  
E
S
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
M
A
I
266 SCHEDULE B”  
Miles  
(Kilometers)  
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.  
Change rear axle fluid.  
Inspect brake linings.  
Inspect engine air cleaner filter, replace if neces-  
sary.  
3,000  
(5 000)  
X
6,000  
(10 000)  
X
9,000  
(14 000)  
X
12,000  
(19 000)  
X
15,000  
(24 000)  
N
T
E
X
X
N
A
N
C
E
X
X
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
M
A
I
SCHEDULE B267  
Miles  
(Kilometers)  
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.  
Change rear axle fluid.  
Inspect brake linings.  
Inspect engine air cleaner filter, replace if neces-  
sary.  
18,000  
(29 000)  
X
21,000  
(34 000)  
X
24,000  
(38 000)  
X
27,000  
30,000  
N
T
(43 000)  
(48 000)  
E
X
X
X
N
A
N
C
E
X
X
S
C
H
E
Replace spark plugs.  
Inspect and replace, if necessary, the PCV orifice.  
X
X*  
D
U
L
E
S
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
M
A
I
268 SCHEDULE B”  
Miles  
(Kilometers)  
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.  
Change rear axle fluid.  
Inspect brake linings.  
Inspect engine air cleaner filter, replace if neces-  
sary.  
33,000  
(53 000)  
X
36,000  
(58 000)  
X
39,000  
(62 000)  
X
42,000  
(67 000)  
X
45,000  
(72 000)  
N
T
E
X
X
N
A
N
C
E
X
X
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
M
A
I
SCHEDULE B269  
Miles  
(Kilometers)  
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.  
Change rear axle fluid.  
Inspect brake linings.  
Inspect engine air cleaner filter, replace if neces-  
sary.  
Replace spark plugs.  
Replace ignition cables.  
Inspect and replace, if necessary, the PCV orifice.  
48,000  
(77 000)  
X
51,000  
(82 000)  
X
54,000  
(86 000)  
X
57,000  
60,000  
N
T
(91 000)  
(96 000)  
E
X
X
X
X
X
N
A
N
C
E
X
S
C
H
E
X
X
X*  
D
U
L
E
S
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
M
A
I
270 SCHEDULE B”  
Miles  
(Kilometers)  
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.  
Inspect engine air cleaner filter.  
Change rear axle fluid.  
Inspect brake linings.  
63,000  
(101 000)  
X
66,000  
(106 000)  
X
69,000  
(110 000)  
X
72,000  
(115 000)  
X
75,000  
(120 000)  
N
T
E
X
X
X
N
A
N
C
E
X
Inspect auto tension drive belt and replace if re-  
quired.  
X
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
M
A
I
SCHEDULE B271  
Miles  
(Kilometers)  
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.  
Change rear axle fluid.  
Inspect brake linings.  
Inspect engine air cleaner filter, replace if neces-  
sary.  
Replace spark plugs.  
Inspect PCV valve, replace as necessary.  
Inspect auto tension drive belt and replace if re-  
quired.  
78,000  
(125 000)  
X
81,000  
(130 000)  
X
84,000  
(134 000)  
X
87,000  
90,000  
N
T
(139 000)  
(144 000)  
E
X
X
X
N
A
N
C
E
X
X
S
C
H
E
X
X*  
X‡  
D
U
L
E
S
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
M
A
I
272 SCHEDULE B”  
Miles  
(Kilometers)  
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.  
Flush and replace engine coolant.  
Flush and replace Power Steering Fluid.  
Inspect brake linings.  
93,000  
(149 000)  
X
96,000  
(154 000)  
X
99,000  
(158 000)  
X
100,000  
(160 000)  
102,000  
(163 000)  
N
T
E
X
X
N
A
N
C
E
X
X
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
M
A
I
SCHEDULE B273  
Miles  
(Kilometers)  
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.  
Change rear axle fluid.  
Inspect brake linings.  
Inspect engine air cleaner filter, replace if  
necessary.  
Replace spark plugs.  
Replace ignition cables.  
Inspect and replace, if necessary, the PCV  
orifice.  
Inspect auto tension drive belt and replace if  
required.  
105,000  
108,000  
111,000  
114,000  
117,000 120,000  
(168 000) (173 000) (178 000) (182 000) (187 000) (192 000)  
N
T
E
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
N
A
N
C
E
X
X
S
C
H
E
X
X
X*  
D
U
L
X‡  
X‡  
E
S
8
* This maintenance is recommended by the manufacture  
to the owner but is not required to maintain the emis-  
sions warranty.  
This maintenance is not required if previously replaced.  
Inspection and service should also be performed anytime  
a malfunction is observed or suspected. Retain all re-  
ceipts.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
M
A
I
274 SCHEDULE A”  
Schedule A”  
N
T
Miles  
(Kilometers)  
[Months]  
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.  
Inspect brake linings.  
Replace engine air cleaner filter.  
Replace spark plugs.  
6,000  
(10 000)  
[6]  
12,000  
(19 000)  
[12]  
18,000  
(29 000)  
[18]  
24,000  
(38 000)  
[24]  
30,000  
(48 000)  
[30]  
E
N
A
N
C
E
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
M
A
I
SCHEDULE A275  
Miles  
(Kilometers)  
[Months]  
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.  
Flush and replace engine coolant at 60  
months, regardless of mileage.  
36,000  
(58 000)  
[36]  
42,000  
(67 000)  
[42]  
48,000  
54,000  
60,000  
66,000  
N
T
(77 000) (84 000) (96 000) (106 000)  
E
[48]  
X
[54]  
X
[60]  
X
[66]  
X
N
A
N
C
E
X
X
X
Inspect brake linings.  
Replace engine air cleaner filter.  
Replace spark plugs.  
Inspect and replace, if necessary, the PCV  
orifice.  
Replace ignition cables.  
X
X
S
C
H
E
X
X
D
U
L
X*  
X
E
S
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
M
A
I
276 SCHEDULE A”  
Miles  
(Kilometers)  
[Months]  
72,000  
78,000  
84,000  
90,000  
96,000  
100,000  
N
T
(115000) (125 000) (134 000) (144 000) (154 000) 160 000  
[72]  
E
[78]  
X
[84]  
X
[90]  
X
[96]  
X
N
A
N
C
E
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.  
Flush and replace Power Steering Fluid.  
Inspect brake linings.  
Replace engine air cleaner filter.  
Replace spark plugs.  
Inspect and replace, if necessary, the PCV  
orifice.  
Inspect auto tension drive belt and replace if  
required.  
X
X
X
X
X
X
S
C
H
E
X*  
D
U
L
X
E
S
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
M
A
I
SCHEDULE A277  
Miles  
(Kilometers)  
[Months]  
102,000  
(163 000)  
[102]  
X
108,000  
(173 000)  
[108]  
114,000  
120,000  
(192 000)  
[120]  
N
T
(182 000)  
[114]  
X
E
N
A
N
C
E
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.  
Flush and replace engine coolant, if not done at 60 mos.  
Inspect brake linings.  
X
X
X
X
Inspect auto tension drive belt and replace if required.  
Replace ignition cables.  
Replace engine air cleaner filter.  
Replace spark plugs.  
X‡  
X‡  
X
X
X
X*  
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
Inspect and replace, if necessary, the PCV orifice.  
E
S
* This maintenance is recommended by the manufacture  
to the owner, but is not required to maintain the emis-  
sions warranty.  
Inspection and service should also be performed anytime  
a malfunction is observed or suspected. Retain all re-  
ceipts.  
8
This maintenance is not required if previously replaced.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
M
A
I
278 SCHEDULE A”  
WARNING!  
N
T
E
You can be badly injured working on or around a  
motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which  
you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If  
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a  
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-  
chanic.  
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE  
CONTENTS  
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283  
MoparParts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285  
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285  
In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285  
Publication Order Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286  
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280  
Prepare For The Appointment . . . . . . . . . . . . 280  
Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280  
Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280  
If You Need Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
280 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE  
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR  
YOUR VEHICLE  
Be Reasonable With Requests  
If you list a number of items, and you must have your  
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with  
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.  
At many dealers you may obtain a rental vehicle at a  
minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is advisable  
to make these arrangements when you call for an ap-  
pointment.  
Prepare For The Appointment  
If youre having warranty work done, be sure to have the  
right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All  
work to be performed may not be covered by the  
warranty, discuss additional charges with the service  
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicles  
service history. This can often provide a clue to the  
current problem.  
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE  
The manufacturer and its dealers are vitally interested in  
your satisfaction. We want you to be happy with our  
products and services.  
Prepare A List  
Make a written list of your vehicles problems or the  
specific work you want done. If youve had an accident,  
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the  
service advisor know.  
Your selling dealer is best equipped and most anxious to  
provide prompt resolution for any warranty issue or  
related matter that you may experience. The manufactur-  
ers dealers have the facilities, factory-trained techni-  
cians, special tools, and the latest information to assure  
your vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 281  
The manufacturer has empowered its dealers to make  
warranty and repair decisions that ensure you are not  
inconvenienced. There is no need for you to wait for a  
decision from the manufacturer. If a special circumstance  
occurs that requires information from the manufacturer,  
we have asked the dealers service management to make  
the contact on your behalf.  
Any communication to the Manufacturers Customer  
Center should include the following information:  
Owners name and address  
Owners telephone number (home and office)  
Dealership name  
Vehicle identification number  
Vehicle delivery date and mileage  
This is why you should always talk to your dealers  
service manager first. Most matters can be resolved with  
this process.  
DaimlerChrysler Motors Corporation Customer Center  
P.O. Box 218004  
Auburn Hills, MI 483218004  
Phone: (800) 992-1997  
If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the  
general manager or owner of the dealership. They  
want to know if you need assistance.  
If your dealership is unable to resolve the concern, you  
may contact the Manufacturers Customer Center.  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
282 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE  
DaimlerChrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center  
P.O. Box 1621  
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6  
Phone (800) 4652001  
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter  
(TTY) in the United States can communicate with the  
manufacturer by dialing 1800380CHRY.  
Service Contract  
In Mexico contact:  
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240  
Sante Fe C.P. 05109  
Mexico, D. F.  
In Mexico (915) 7291248 or 7291240  
Outside Mexico (525) 7291248 or 7291240  
You may have purchased a service contract for your  
vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unex-  
pected repairs after your manufacturers new vehicle  
limited warranty expires. The manufacturer stands be-  
hind only the manufacturers Service Contracts. If you  
purchased a manufacturers Service Contract, you will  
receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card  
in the mail within three weeks of your vehicle delivery  
date. If you have any questions about your service  
contract, call the manufacturers Service Contract Na-  
tional Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922.  
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech  
Impaired (TDD/TTY)  
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the  
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommuni-  
cation Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its Customer  
Center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer who  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 283  
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service  
contract that is not the manufacturers Service Contract. It  
is not responsible for any service contract other than the  
manufacturers Service Contract. If you purchased a  
service contract that is not a manufacturers Service  
Contract, and you require service after your manufactur-  
ers new vehicle limited warranty expires, please refer to  
your contract documents, and contact the person listed in  
those documents.  
WARRANTY INFORMATION  
See your manufacturers Warranty Information Booklet  
for information on warranty coverage and transfer of  
warranty.  
We appreciate that you have made a major investment  
when you purchased your new vehicle. Your dealer has  
also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and  
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with  
your ownership experience. Youll be pleased with their  
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related  
concerns.  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
284 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 285  
MOPARPARTS  
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety  
Hotline toll free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in Wash-  
ington DC area) or write to: NHTSA, U.S. Dept. of  
Transportation, Washington DC 20590. You can also  
obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from  
the Hotline.  
Moparfluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are  
available from your dealer. They will help you keep your  
vehicle operating at its best.  
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS  
In the 50 United States and Washington D.C.: If you  
believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause  
a crash or cause injury or death, you should immediately  
inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administra-  
tion (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the manufacturer.  
In Canada:  
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you  
should contact the Customer Service Department imme-  
diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety  
defect to the Canadian government should write to  
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations  
and Recalls, 2780 Sheffield Road, Ottawa, Ontario K1B  
3V9.  
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an  
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in  
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy  
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in  
individual problems between you, your dealer, and the  
manufacturer.  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
286 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE  
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS  
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals.  
To order the following manuals, you may use either the  
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mas-  
tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are ac-  
cepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call  
for an order form.  
Filled with diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations,  
these practical manuals make it easy for students and  
technicians to find and fix problems on computer-  
controlled vehicle systems and features. They show  
exactly how to find and correct problems the first time,  
using step-by-step troubleshooting and driveability  
procedures, proven diagnostic tests and a complete list  
of all tools and equipment.  
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering  
manuals. (No P.O. Boxes).  
Service Manuals.  
Owner’s Manuals.  
These comprehensive service manuals provide the  
information that students and professional technicians  
need in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving,  
maintaining, servicing and repairing DaimlerChrysler  
Corporation vehicles. A complete working knowledge  
of the vehicle, system and/or components is written in  
straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams  
and charts.  
These manuals have been prepared with the assistance  
of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you  
with specific Chrysler group vehicles. Included are  
starting, operating, emergency and maintenance pro-  
cedures as well as specifications, capabilities and  
safety tips.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 287  
Call Toll Free at 18008904038 (U.S.) or 18003871143  
(Canada)  
Or  
Visit us on the World Wide Web at:  
www.techauthority.daimlerchrysler.com or  
www.daimlerchrysler.ca/manuals  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INDEX  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
290 INDEX  
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186,197  
Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184  
Air Cleaner, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225  
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229  
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229  
Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229  
Air Pressure, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172,179  
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39,44  
Airbag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60,125  
Airbag On/Off Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44  
Airbag, Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47  
Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24,127  
Alignment and Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178  
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7  
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236  
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258  
Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129,161  
Anti-Theft System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24,127  
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243  
Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260  
Axle Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240,260  
Axle Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240  
Ball Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231  
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228  
Emergency Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208  
Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242  
Belts, Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224  
Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28  
Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232  
B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167  
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260  
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160,238  
Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160  
Disc Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INDEX 291  
Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240  
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238  
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158  
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128  
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249  
Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248  
Button, Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153  
CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132,134  
Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67  
Center High Mounted Stop Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 255  
Center Seat Storage Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . 114  
Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189  
Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164  
Check Engine Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124  
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49,50  
Child Restraint Tether Anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53,55  
Child Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50,55  
Cigar Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113  
Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182  
Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141  
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131  
Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240  
Clutch Linkage Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240  
Compact Disc Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139  
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175  
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103  
Calibration, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103  
Camper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118  
Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258  
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230  
Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244  
Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59,185  
Cargo Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90  
Catalytic Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188,226  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
292 INDEX  
Compass Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103  
Computer, Trip/Travel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100  
Console, Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99  
Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282  
Converter, Catalytic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188  
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234  
Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258  
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235  
Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237  
Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235  
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234  
Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235,237  
Selection of Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236,259  
Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127  
Crankcase Emission Control System . . . . . . . . . . 227  
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96  
Cup Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114  
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280  
Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89  
Defroster, Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67,144  
Delay Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92  
Differential, Limited-Slip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157  
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230  
Disc Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238  
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237  
Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126  
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14  
Door Opener, Garage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106  
Drive Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224  
Electric Rear Window Defrost . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67,144  
Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112  
Electronic Speed Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96  
Emergency Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INDEX 293  
Ethylene Glycol Antifreeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236  
Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59,233,234  
Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88  
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211  
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196  
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202  
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208  
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212  
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216  
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225  
Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57  
Compartment Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216  
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236,259  
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185  
Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154  
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220,259  
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222  
Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223  
Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127  
Equipment Identification Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194  
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225  
Engine Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225  
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224,259  
Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224  
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90  
Flat Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201,207  
Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154  
Fluid, Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260  
Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258  
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241  
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
294 INDEX  
Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89,257  
Four-Way Hazard Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196  
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211  
Front Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240  
Front Wheel Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242  
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182  
Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186  
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225  
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130  
Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182,259  
Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258  
Fueling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186  
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247  
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130  
Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126  
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126  
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125  
Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125  
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246  
GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189  
Hands-Free Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67  
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196  
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84  
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88,249  
High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91  
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch . . . . . . . . . 91  
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89  
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91  
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88  
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67,144  
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch . . . . . . . . . . . 91  
Garage Door Opener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106  
Gas Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186  
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183  
Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128  
Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INDEX 295  
Hoisting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207  
Homelink Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106  
Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84  
Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238  
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208  
Key, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12  
Key, Sentry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11  
Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11  
Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17  
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11,14  
Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14,152  
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11,14  
Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14  
Infant Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49,50  
Inflation Pressure Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179  
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123,124  
Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122  
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246  
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245  
Intermittent Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92  
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4  
Lane Change and Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90  
Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28  
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60,86  
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49,125  
Anti-Lock Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129,161  
Battery Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87  
Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128  
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248,249  
Center Mounted Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255  
Check Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124  
Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198  
Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
296 INDEX  
Courtesy/Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99  
Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89  
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89,257  
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196  
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88  
High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91,125  
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125  
High Beam/Low Beam Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91  
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124  
Intensity Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87  
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86,99  
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89  
Low Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130  
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91  
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125  
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248,249  
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90,125,249,253  
Limited-Slip Differential . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157  
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167  
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14  
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14  
Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14  
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11  
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14  
Steering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14  
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242  
Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232  
Lug Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206  
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220  
Maintenance Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228  
Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220  
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262  
Schedule A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INDEX 297  
Schedule B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265  
Malfunction Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218  
Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286  
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155  
Lubricant Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260  
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65  
Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65  
Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66  
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65  
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7  
Mopar Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220,285  
Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90  
Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220  
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224  
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224,259  
Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224  
Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223  
Materials Added to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224  
Pressure Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126  
Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222  
Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223  
Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217  
Opener, Garage Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106  
Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217  
Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65  
Overhead Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99,100  
Overhead Travel Information Center . . . . . . . . . . 100  
Owners Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286  
Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27  
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129,130  
Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129,130  
Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220,259  
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258  
Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221  
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158  
Passenger Airbag On/Off Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
298 INDEX  
Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91  
Pedals, Adjustable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95  
Phone, Cellular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67  
Phone, Hands-Free . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67  
Pickup Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116  
Distribution Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247  
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14  
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66  
Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112  
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80  
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162,230  
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26  
Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260  
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38  
Programmable Electronic Features . . . . . . . . . 107,111  
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175  
Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235,237  
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132  
Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240  
Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259  
Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182  
Relays and Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247  
Reminder, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37  
Remote Keyless Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17  
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177  
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285  
Restraint, Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84  
Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49,55  
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181,264  
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INDEX 299  
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60  
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60  
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285  
Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163  
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58  
Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262  
Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247  
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37  
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27,28,60  
And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38  
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49,57  
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38  
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28  
Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36  
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125  
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79,82  
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79  
Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57  
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80  
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24,127  
Selection of Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259  
Selection of Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222  
Sentry Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11  
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280  
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282  
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286  
Setting the Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131  
Shift Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156  
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155  
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155  
Shoulder Belt Upper Anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35  
Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28  
Side Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47  
Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90  
Snow Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179  
Snow Plow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192  
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
300 INDEX  
Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225  
Speed Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96  
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126  
Start Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153  
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153  
Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154  
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153  
Column Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90  
Column Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14  
Linkage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231  
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162,230  
Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94  
Storage, Behind the Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114  
Storage Compartment, Center Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . 114  
Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248  
Storing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248  
Sulfur in Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184  
Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223  
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125  
Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118  
Tether Anchor, Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53,55  
Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94  
Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166  
Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163  
Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163  
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60,171  
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171  
Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178  
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179  
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201  
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175  
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171  
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174  
Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INDEX 301  
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202  
Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167,168  
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175  
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177  
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181,264  
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163,171  
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164  
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180  
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201  
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176  
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177  
Wheel Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202  
Wheel Nut Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206  
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241  
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153,155  
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155,156  
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener . . . . . . . . . . . . 106  
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177  
Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100  
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129,130  
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90,125,249,253  
Underhood Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247  
Universal Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106  
Variance, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104  
Vehicle Identification Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6  
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168,189  
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7  
Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248  
Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125  
Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212  
Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193  
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192  
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
302 INDEX  
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283  
Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93,232  
Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244  
Wheel Alignment and Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178  
Wheel and Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245  
Wheel Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201  
Wheel Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202  
Wheel Nut Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206  
Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27  
Window Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47  
Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145  
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26  
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26  
Rear Sliding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27  
Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92,93,232  
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92,232  
Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232  
Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92  
Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232  
Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Coleman Camping Equipment 2142 700 User Manual
Conceptronic Printer C54PSERVU User Manual
Crate Amplifiers Musical Instrument Amplifier GX212 User Manual
Delta Electronics Power Supply HAL1345 User Manual
Dynaudio Speaker SUB 600 User Manual
Dynex Computer Drive DX HDEN20 User Manual
Edelbrock Automobile Parts Victor Series User Manual
Euro Pro Electric Steamer KS315W User Manual
Fortinet Network Card ASM CX4 User Manual
Gefen Network Card DVI User Manual